JP7070610B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

Conventionally, a lottery has been executed in which a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at the start opening, a predetermined symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a display device for a predetermined time, and then the lottery result is stopped and displayed. To. While the predetermined symbol is changing, a notice symbol or the like for notifying the player of the lottery result is displayed .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223600

In this type of pachinko machine or the like, there has been a demand for a game production that further enhances the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention is displayed on a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a display means thereof. A state setting means that includes a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information, and can set one effect state from a plurality of effect states including a first effect state and a second effect state. Specific information determining means capable of determining specific information for selecting a background image displayed on the display means associated with each of the first effect state and the second effect state, and the specific information determining means. A plurality of staging modes associated with the specific information are displayed on the display means while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means according to the specific information determined by the above. The specific information determining means includes the effect mode selection means that can be selected from the above, and determines the specific information dedicated to the first effect state when the first effect state is set, and the second effect. When the state is set, it is possible to determine the specific information dedicated to the first effect state and the specific information dedicated to the second effect state, and the game machine is set to the second effect state. If so, it is possible to display the background image corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the second effect state on the display means, and the effect mode selection means is based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means. When the effect mode is configured to be selectable and the second effect state is set, the effect mode corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the first effect state and the specific information dedicated to the second effect state. The effect mode corresponding to the above is configured to be selectable, and the background image corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the second effect state determined by the specific information determining means is used. When the effect mode is not selected, it is possible to select the effect mode according to the background image corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the first effect state determined by the specific information determination means. Is.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information displayed on the display means are operated. A state setting means capable of setting one effect state from a plurality of effect states including a first effect state and a second effect state, and the first effect state. A specific information determining means capable of determining specific information for selecting a background image displayed on the display means associated with the second effect state, and the specific information determining means determined by the specific information determining means. Depending on the specific information, the effect mode to be displayed on the display means while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means can be selected from a plurality of effect modes associated with the specific information . The specific information determining means determines the specific information dedicated to the first effect state when the first effect state is set, and the second effect state is set . In this case, it is possible to determine the specific information dedicated to the first effect state and the specific information dedicated to the second effect state, and the gaming machine may be set to the second effect state. It is possible to display the background image corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the second effect state on the display means, and the effect mode selection means selects the effect mode based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means. When the second effect state is set, the effect mode corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the first effect state and the effect corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the second effect state are possible. The mode and the mode are configured to be selectable, and the staging mode corresponding to the background image corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the second staging state determined by the specific information determining means is not selected. In this case, it is possible to select the staging mode according to the background image corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the first staging state determined by the specific information determining means .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of a game board. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotary operation unit. It is a rear view of a rotary operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary operation unit which looked at the disassembled rotary operation unit from the front. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary operation unit which looked at the disassembled rotary operation unit from the front. (A) is a front view of a case body, and (b) is a front view of a fixing member. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the support structure by the case body of the 1st gear, the 2nd gear and the 3rd gear. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the composite operation unit which looked at the disassembled composite operation unit from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit in the state where a part of the composite operation unit is disassembled. It is a front perspective view of the opening / closing first gear, the opening / closing second gear, the rotating first gear, and the rotating second gear. It is a partially enlarged front view of the compound operation unit explaining the process of assembling the opening / closing 1st gear, the opening / closing 2nd gear, the rotating 1st gear, and the rotating 2nd gear to the 1st shaft and the 2nd shaft in chronological order. It is a partially enlarged front view of the compound operation unit explaining the process of assembling the opening / closing 1st gear, the opening / closing 2nd gear, the rotating 1st gear, and the rotating 2nd gear to the 1st shaft and the 2nd shaft in chronological order. It is an exploded front view of the composite operation unit for demonstrating the relative displacement state of the opening / closing 2nd gear and a slide rack member with respect to a back arm body. It is a front view of the compound operation unit which showed the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operation member in time series. It is a front schematic diagram of the composite operation unit which schematically shows the meshing state of the opening / closing 1st gear and the opening / closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotating 1st gear and the rotating 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the composite operation unit which schematically shows the meshing state of the opening / closing 1st gear and the opening / closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotating 1st gear and the rotating 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the composite operation unit which schematically shows the meshing state of the opening / closing 1st gear and the opening / closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotating 1st gear and the rotating 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front view of the 1st coupling operation unit and the 2nd coupling operation unit in a state where the 1st engagement member and a pair of 2nd coupling members are arranged in the retracted position. It is a front view of the 1st coupling operation unit and the 2nd coupling operation unit in a state where a 1st engagement member and a pair of 2nd coupling members are arranged at a coupling position. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit, and (b) is a bottom view of the first coupling operation unit in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 33 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st coupling operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st coupling operation unit. It is a rear view of a drive part. (A) is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism portion, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism portion. It is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism part which looked at the disassembled slide mechanism part from the front. It is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism part which looked at the disassembled slide mechanism part from the back. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state where the first coupling member is arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state where the first coupling member is arranged in the retracted position. It is a rear view of the operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state where the first coupling member is arranged at the coupling position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state where the first coupling member is arranged at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd coupling operation unit. (A) is a front view of the second coupling operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second coupling operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd coupling operation unit. It is a model diagram which front view | It is a front perspective view of the annulus operation unit in a state where an annulus forming member is arranged in a retracted position. It is a front perspective view of the annulus operation unit in a state where an annulus forming member is arranged at a coupling position. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the annulus operation unit which looked at the disassembled annulus operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled rear perspective view of the annulus operation unit which looked at the disassembled annulus operation unit from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the link member, (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member, and (c) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member in the partial Lc of FIG. 50 (a). (D) is a side view of the link member in the direction of arrow Ld in FIG. 50 (a). It is a partially enlarged rear view of an annulus operation unit. It is a rear schematic diagram of the annulus operation unit which schematically illustrates the annulus operation unit which a pair of annulus forming members are arranged in the retracted position. It is sectional drawing of the circular motion unit in the LIII-LIII line of FIG. 52. It is a rear schematic diagram of the annulus operation unit which schematically illustrates the annulus operation unit which arranged the pair of an annulus forming members in the position intermediate between the retracting position and the coupling position. It is sectional drawing of the ring operation unit in the LV-LV line of FIG. 54. It is a back schematic diagram of the annulus operation unit which schematically illustrates the annulus operation unit which a pair of an annulus forming members are arranged in the coupling position. FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an annular motion unit in the LVII-LVII line of FIG. 56. It is a front perspective view of the swinging operation unit in the state that the arm member is extended to the overhanging position. It is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit 800 in the state where the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position. It is a front perspective view of the rocking operation unit in the state where the arm member is retracted to the retracted position. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the rocking operation unit which looked at the disassembled rocking operation unit from the front. (A) is a rear view of the swinging operation unit in a state where the arm member is arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swinging operation unit in the partial LXIb of FIG. 61 (a). be. (A) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit in the partial LXIIb of FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit in the partial LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). (A) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit in the partial LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). It is a timing chart which showed an example of the selection example of the background mode in a normal game period and a time effect period. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control unit, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type selection table, and (c) is a normal hit random number table. Is a diagram schematically showing. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection table for jackpots which is a part of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a variation pattern selection for deviation which is a part of the variation pattern selection table. It is a figure which showed the table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the sub-variation pattern selection table when the normal background is displayed. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the sub-variation pattern selection table when the forced background is displayed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the ordinary background selection table schematically. It is the figure which showed the contents of the normal background notice selection table schematically, and (b) is the figure which showed the contents of the forced background notice selection table schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronization effect management process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the display effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows the display advance notice command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing a display rear surface command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. FIG. 99 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the rotating member and the special symbol in the form. (A) to (b) are timing charts showing an example of a display mode of a special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device when the rotating member operates in the form of FIG. 99 (b). FIG. 99 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of a display mode of a special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device when the rotating member operates in the form of FIG. 99 (b). (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the form of FIG. 99 (b), and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the form of FIG. 99 (b). Is a diagram schematically showing. FIG. 99 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the pseudo-variation selection table in the form. FIG. 99 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the pseudo-variation selection table in the form. FIG. 99 (b) is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the embodiment. FIG. 99 (b) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the embodiment. FIG. 99 (b) is a flowchart showing a normal effect selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the embodiment. FIG. 99 (b) is a flowchart showing a winning command receiving process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the case where the fusion effect in 3rd Embodiment is executed. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device when the fusion effect in the third embodiment is executed. This is an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the fusion effect in the third embodiment is executed. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device when the long press effect in the third embodiment is executed. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a figure shown. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fusion effect selection table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fusion variation pattern selection table in the third embodiment. Is. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the normal effect selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fusion jackpot effect process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the jackpot effect in the fourth embodiment is executed. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the jackpot effect in the fourth embodiment is executed. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a figure shown. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot effect process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device when the combined operation unit according to the fifth embodiment operates. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device when the combined operation unit according to the fifth embodiment operates.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning opening 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back surface side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular first specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, and a circular shape having a size similar to that of the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 is formed in a substantially central portion thereof. A second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specified winning openings 65a and 650a, which are normally closed, are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (opening / closing solenoid) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is an opening which is a guide path for guiding the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a and an opening on the opposite side of the guide path from the second specific winning opening 650a side. A small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the 651, the driving accessory 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and the driving accessory 650b in the left-right direction around the lower side of the opening 651 (not shown). And have. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the driving accessory 650b to the right, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state of time.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. When a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is set for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower right side of the first winning opening 64. Not limited to the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71 and a second out port 72. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 71 or the second out opening 72 (not shown). You will be guided to the road. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, while the second out opening 72 is arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, the second out port 72 is arranged on the opposite side of the first out port 71 with the second specific winning opening 650a interposed therebetween.

Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) on the right side (right side of FIG. 2) in front of the second specific winning opening 650a is an inner rail. It flows down along the inclination of the 61 or the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61) on the left side of the front view from the second specific winning opening 650a. ) Is flown down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 72.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuates effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, an RTC (real-time clock) 264, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 340, 430, 522, 640, 740, 830.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as the variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

The details of the configurations of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 66 to 78.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the layout (arrangement) of each configuration such as the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a and the out openings 71, 72 in the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 5, each configuration of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a and the like is schematically shown, and a part of the game board 13 is partially enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the front view of the game area, the portion of the inner rail 61 arranged on the lower right side (the portion on the right side of the first out port 71) is extended in a straight line and is second. 1 It is formed so as to be inclined upward toward a direction away from the out port 71.

A resin outer edge member 73 that defines the outer edge of the game area is disposed together with both the rails 61 and 62 between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. Rail. The outer edge member 73 is formed by providing an arc-shaped wall surface extending the outer rail 62 on the inner surface side, and is continuously provided below the arc wall portion 73a in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). A vertical wall portion 73b formed by providing a wall surface extending linearly along the inner surface side, and a series of vertical wall portions 73b below the vertical wall portion 73b, extending linearly while inclining downward toward the inner rail 61. It is composed of an inclined wall portion 73c formed by providing a wall surface to be provided on the inner surface side.

As described above, in the game area defined by the inner rail 61, the outer rail 62, and the outer edge member 73, a part of a substantially circular shape (lower right part in FIG. 5) is formed in a substantially rectangular shape and expanded outward. It is said to be a shape. Specifically, the region defined by the linear portion of the inner rail 61 arranged on the right side of the first out port 71 and the inclined wall portion 73c and the vertical wall portion 73b of the outer edge member 73 has a substantially rectangular shape. Is formed in.

As a result, as compared with the case where the game area is formed in a substantially circular shape extending the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, the game area as a whole is provided with a substantially rectangular area (lower right part in FIG. 5). The area can be expanded. Therefore, the expanded area is used as a space for arranging the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, and the like. Alternatively, it can be utilized as a space for forming a path for the ball to flow down, and the degree of freedom in arranging the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a, the flow path for the ball, and the like can be increased. As a result, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered downward (lower side in FIG. 5), so that the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased accordingly.

That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in series along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5) below the third symbol display device 81. Was there. Therefore, the space required below the third symbol display device 81 increases in the vertical direction, which hinders the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the enlarged portion of the game area (the substantially rectangular area, the lower right part in FIG. 5) is used as an arrangement space such as a winning opening or a flow path of a ball. It can be used as a space. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged not directly under the first winning opening 64 but in the expanded portion of the above-mentioned gaming area. Therefore, since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered by that amount, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, according to the gaming machine 13 of the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is not directly under the first winning opening 64, but is on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (variable winning device). The ball cannot pass between the position (that is, the second specified winning opening 650a and the inner rail 61) that is offset to the opposite side of 65 (left side in FIG. 5) and abuts on the inner rail 61 (lower edge of the gaming area). It is placed at the position where Therefore, since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered by that amount, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

In this case, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, by providing two routes (first out port 71 and second out port 72) for discharging the ball from the game area to the ball discharge path, the first 3 It is possible to further increase the size of the symbol display device 81.

That is, in order to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, so that the position of the winning opening must be lowered accordingly. For example, when the position of the first winning opening 64 is lowered downward, the guide plate member 74 (a member that guides a ball at the time of right-handed hitting (a ball passing to the right of the variable display device unit 80) to the second specific winning opening 650a). ) Also needs to be lowered downward in order to secure a space for the ball to flow down between the first winning opening 64 and, as a result, the position of the second specific winning opening 650a also needs to be lowered downward.

However, if the position of the second specific winning opening 650a is lowered too much, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the ball to flow down below the second specific winning opening 650a (between the inner rail 61). That is, the ball that has flowed down without being won in the winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening arranged below the first winning opening 64. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the second specific winning opening 650a downward, which is a factor that makes it impossible to sufficiently increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the first out port 71, the second out port 72 sandwiches the second specific winning opening 650a and the first out port 71. (That is, the first out port 71 and the second out port 72 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a, respectively), so that the ball flows down the game area. The ball that reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 5) of the front view from the second specific winning opening 650a is inclined to the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73. The ball that has flowed down along the line and can be discharged to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the ball that reaches the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the front view from the second specific winning opening 650a is the inner rail 61. It can flow down along an inclination (curvature) and can be discharged from the second out port 72 to the ball discharge path.

In this way, by providing two routes (first out port 71 and second out port 72) for discharging the ball from the game area to the ball discharge path, the lower side (inner rail) of the second specific winning opening 650a is provided. It is not necessary to secure a space for the ball to flow down (between 61). Therefore, since the position of the second specific winning opening 650a can be further lowered (close to or connected to the inner rail 61), the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered by that amount, and by extension, the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered. Since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered downward, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased accordingly.

In the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first specific winning opening 65a are offset to the right side of the board surface, and the second specific winning opening 650a is offset to the left side of the board surface and is close to the inner rail 61. By being arranged (or in contact with each other), the effect of the rotary operation unit 300 can be more effectively performed.

That is, when the player strikes to the right, only the right side of the board on which the ball flows down is noticed by the player, and in particular, for the ball that has not won the second winning opening 640, after that. The flow is rarely noticed by players. In this case, in the present embodiment, among the balls that have passed to the right of the variable display device unit 80, the balls that have passed from right to left on the upper side of the second winning opening 640 pass through the upper side of the guide plate member 74. It is flowed down toward the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, even if the second winning opening 640 is not won, the opportunity to win the second specific winning opening 650a is generated, and the second is expected from the expectation of winning the second specific winning opening 650a. The ball that has passed from right to left on the upper side of the winning opening 640 can be made to pay attention to the player (look at it). As a result, the line of sight of the player can be directed to the center of the board surface below the variable display device unit 80. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the rotation operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the first winning opening 64, and the rotation operation unit 300 can be visually recognized through the game board 13 (through the game board 13). Therefore, when a ball that has not won a prize in the second winning opening 640 flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a, the player is made to visually recognize the effect of the rotation operation unit 300, and such a rotation operation is performed. The effect of the unit 300 can be enhanced.

As described above, in the game board 13, the base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the rotary operation unit 300 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 is made visible to the player from the front side. Is possible. Here, the rotary operation unit 300 is a device that is operated with the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the result of the lottery by the winning as a trigger, and is the first device on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). 1 It is arranged at a position corresponding to the winning opening 64.

Therefore, for a player who visually follows a ball flowing down toward the first winning opening 64, in particular, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a rotation operation is performed behind the first winning opening 64. Since the effect of the unit 300 can be visually recognized, it is possible to effectively perform the effect associated with the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64. The detailed configuration of the rotary operation unit 300 will be described later.

In this case, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are offset from the first winning opening 64 in the left-right direction (width direction of the game area, right direction in FIG. 5). , The positions of the first winning opening 64 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be lowered downward (lower side in FIG. 5), and as a result, the rotary operation unit 300 is positioned corresponding to the first winning opening 64 and is the game board 13. Even when the base plate 60 is arranged on the back surface side, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

That is, when the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction as in a conventional pachinko machine, the position corresponding to the first winning opening 64 In the above, disposing the rotary operation unit 300 on the back surface side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) causes the rotary operation unit 300 to interfere with the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65. The space required for arranging the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 increases in the vertical direction, which hinders the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 are oriented in the left-right direction with respect to the first winning opening 64. Since they are arranged offset in the (width direction of the game area), it is possible to avoid interference between the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and the rotary operation unit 300. By the minute, the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered downward, and the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

In particular, the first variable winning device 65 is offset to the right by using the area enlarged in a substantially rectangular shape on the lower right side of the game area, so that the offset amount can be sufficiently secured and the second variable can be obtained. As for the winning device 650, by providing the second out port 72 in addition to the first out port 71, the position can be lowered downward without considering the securing of the lower space for the ball to flow down. can. As a result, a wider space for arranging the rotary operation unit 300 can be secured, so that it is possible to solve the contradictory problems of increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81 and increasing the size of the rotary operation unit 300. As a result, it is possible to enhance both the effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of the rotation operation unit 300.

Here, the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape that can rotate around the first winning opening 64. As a result, the entire surrounding area surrounding the first winning opening 64 can be used as an area for staging. That is, the effect of the rotation operation unit 300 can be visually recognized by the player on the back side of the first winning opening 64. Therefore, when the production is started with the winning of the first winning opening 64 as an opportunity, the production is performed in the area centering on the first winning opening 64 in which the ball has entered, so that the first winning opening 64 is performed. It is possible to enhance the staging effect of the staging that accompanies the winning of the prize.

Further, when the player starts to win a ball in the first winning opening 64 when the state of the rotation operation unit 300 (for example, the rotation position or the lighting state) becomes a predetermined state, the player starts. It is possible to insert the game ball toward the center of the object (rotational operation unit 300 in a predetermined state) that the player is visually recognizing, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of the rotation operation unit 300. ..

Further, by forming the rotary operation unit 300 in a substantially circular shape in this way, the space around the rotary operation unit 300 can be effectively utilized, and the arrangement space for other winning openings and the like can be efficiently used. Can be secured. In particular, the arrangement space of the second variable winning device 650 can be efficiently secured. That is, since the first variable winning device 65 can be offset to the right with respect to the first winning opening 64 by using the area expanded in a substantially rectangular shape on the lower right side of the game area, the offset amount to the right side can be set. On the other hand, it is relatively easy to secure the second variable winning device 650, but since the inner rail 61 is curved in an arc shape, it is difficult to sufficiently secure the offset amount to the left side with respect to the first winning opening 64. Become. In this case, since the rotary operation unit 300 has a substantially circular shape, the space for arranging the second variable winning device 650 on the lower left side of the rotary operation unit 300 is efficient between the inner rail 61 and the space. Can be secured.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape centered on the first winning opening 64, the rotation operation unit 300 can be arranged substantially in the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 5) of the game area. can. That is, the center of the rotary operation unit 300 can be arranged on the virtual line that maximizes the distance between the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and the inner rail 61 (distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 5). Therefore, since the limited space of the game area can be effectively utilized while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, a wider space for arranging the rotation operation unit 300 is secured, and such rotation operation is performed. The size of the unit 300 can also be increased efficiently.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning opening 640 is not directly under the first winning opening 64, but on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (the first variable winning device 65 side). , Is offset to the right side of FIG. 5). In this case, the second winning opening 640 is arranged so that the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is not necessary to provide a space for the ball to flow down to the second winning opening 640 above the second winning opening 640, and the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is increased accordingly. Can be lowered downwards. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second specific winning opening 650a is not directly under the first winning opening 64, but is on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (first variable winning opening). It is offset and placed on the opposite side of the device 65 (on the left side of FIG. 5). In this case, the second specific winning opening 650a is arranged so that the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is not necessary to provide a space for the ball to flow down to the second specific winning opening 650a above the second specific winning opening 650a, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is made by that amount. The position of can be lowered. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

That is, when the opening 641 of the second winning opening 640 and the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged in a facing posture above the game area (upper side of FIG. 5), a space for flowing down the ball is provided. It is necessary to secure the space directly above the openings 641,651, and it is necessary to raise the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 upward by that amount, which hinders the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the openings 641,651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area as in the present embodiment, a space for flowing the ball is provided diagonally above the openings 641,651 (upper right side in FIG. 5). The position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered by that amount. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

In this way, when the openings 641,651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, the electric accessory 640a, 650b is not directly above the second winning opening 640 and the second specific winning opening 650a, but is the second. It can be arranged on the side of the winning opening 640 and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it is not necessary to secure the arrangement space for the electric accessories 640a and 650b directly above the second winning opening 640 and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered by that amount. Can be lowered to. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased.

Further, since the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is not necessary to provide a pair of electric accessory 640a and 650b for opening and closing the openings 641,651, and only one side is used. be able to. As a result, the capacity required for the driving means (for example, the solenoid) for driving the electric accessories 640a and 650b can be miniaturized, and the component cost can be reduced. At the same time, energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, since the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the difficulty of winning the second winning opening 640 from being excessively lowered. That is, in the present embodiment, since the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered downward, the space for arranging the winning openings and the like is limited, and the arrangement positions of the second winning opening 640 and the through gate 67 are arranged. The interval becomes narrower. Therefore, compared to a conventional pachinko machine in which the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, it is more difficult to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640. It may be reduced and the playability may be impaired. Therefore, by forming the opening 641 so as to face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning from directly above the second winning opening 640, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. It is possible to make it possible to win a prize only in the second winning opening 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level of winning the second winning opening 640 from decreasing and improve the playability.

Further, even if the distance (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 5) from the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a to the second specific winning opening 650a is increased by the opening 651 facing the other side in the width direction of the game area. It does not affect the distance between the third symbol display device 81 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, a sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of a ball in the second specific winning opening 650a is arranged between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Can be done. As a result, the detection speed at which the ball has won the second specific winning opening 650a can be increased, so that the player's feeling of exhilaration associated with the winning can be enhanced.

In addition to this, it is possible to prevent over-winning to the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls wins in the open second specific winning opening 650a, the tenth one. It is desirable that the driving accessory 650b is closed as soon as the ball wins a prize. However, when the sensor device 652 is arranged behind the base plate 60, the distance from the opening 651 to the sensor device 652 is increased.

Therefore, the period from when the tenth ball passes through the opening 651 to when it reaches the sensor device 652, that is, the period when the driving accessory 650b is in the open state becomes long, and the eleventh and subsequent balls from the opening 651. A state in which a prize can be won is formed in the second specific winning opening 650a for a long period of time, and there is a risk that the fairness of the game will be lost.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the sensor device 652 that detects the winning of the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a is between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Since it is arranged in, the period until the sphere that has passed through the opening 651 is detected by the sensor device 652 can be shortened. As a result, it is difficult for the eleventh and subsequent balls to win a prize from the opening 651, and it is possible to prevent over-winning.

Here, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged so as to be offset in the left-right (one side with the other side) direction of the game board 13, respectively. By doing so, the player is allowed to make a distinction between left and right, which contributes to the improvement of playability.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, it is easier to win a prize by passing the right side of the variable display device unit 80 to the first specific winning opening 65a, while it is easier to win a prize to the second specific winning opening 650a. It is easier to win a prize if you pass the left side of the unit 80. Which specific winning opening will be opened is determined by the stop symbol of the jackpot at that time, and the player will hit the left and right in order to aim at the specific winning opening on the side to be opened.

Which specific winning opening is opened can be set in units of the number of times (round) for each stop symbol of the jackpot, so only the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened each time. On the other hand, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a may be alternately opened every number of times (rounds).

Therefore, it is necessary for the player to confirm which specific winning opening is open in units of the number of times (round), and to aim at the opening specific winning opening, it is necessary to strike left and right. It has the effect of drawing attention not only to the other side but also to one side. That is, to prevent a situation in which the player pays attention only to one side or the other side of the game board 13, and to create a situation in which the rotary operation unit 300 arranged behind the first winning opening 64 is in the field of view. Therefore, the rotary operation unit 300 can be noticed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by making the decision to hit the left and right for each number of big hits (rounds), and by letting the player hit the left and right in the same posture. The feeling of fatigue caused by playing can be alleviated.

Next, the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 13. First, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 to 800 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9.

FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 7 to 9 are an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 with the disassembled operation unit 200 viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the swing operation unit 800, the annulus operation unit 700, and the first coupling operation unit 500 are mounted on the rear case 210, and FIG. 9 shows a state in which the swing operation unit 800, the ring operation unit 700, and the first coupling operation unit 500 are mounted on the rear case 210. Further, a state in which the second coupling operation unit 600 and the combined operation unit 400 are mounted on the rear case 210 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 7) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The operation unit 200 has a rotary operation unit 300, a combined operation unit 400, a first coupling operation unit 500, a second coupling operation unit 600, an annular operation unit 700, and a swing operation unit 800 in the internal space of the rear case 210, respectively. It is housed and is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first coupling operation unit 500 is located above the opening 211a, the annular operation unit 700 is located below the opening 211a, and the swinging operation unit 800 is located on the left and right sides of the opening 211a. , Each arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 8).

In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 8, the second coupling operation unit 600 is arranged on the front side of the annular operation unit 700, and the composite operation unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the swing operation unit 800 in a laminated state. And housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 9). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 9, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged in a laminated state in which it is overlapped on the front side of the second coupling operation unit 600, and is housed in the back case 210 (see FIG. 6).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the other operating units (for example, the rotary operating unit 300) are arranged in a laminated state in which the other operating units (for example, the rotary operating unit 300) are superposed on the front side with respect to the predetermined operating unit (for example, the second coupling operating unit 600). Therefore, in front view, at least a part of a predetermined operation unit (for example, front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600, see FIG. 42) can be shielded by another operation unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 is formed of a light transmissive material and the movement unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, only the necessary part of the predetermined movement unit is visible. Can be made visible to the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. ..

Next, the outline of the operation mode of each unit 300 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13. In the description of FIGS. 10 to 13, FIGS. 6 to 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

10 to 13 are front views of the operating unit 200. It should be noted that FIG. 10 shows a state in which the annulus forming member 790 of the annulus operating unit 700 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 11 shows a state in which the arm member 820 of the annulus operating unit 800 is arranged at the overhanging position. In No. 12, the first engaging member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 are arranged at the coupling positions, and in FIG. 13, the operation members 491 of the composite operation unit 400 are arranged. The state in which the 492 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

The annulus operation unit 700 includes a pair of annulus forming members 790, and these pair of annulus forming members 790 are operated (displaced) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the coupling position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are retracted to the back side of the rotary operation unit 300 while being distributed to the left and right, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 10, the pair of annulus forming members 790 are arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81) and are coupled to each other (pair). An annulus shape is formed by the annulus forming member 790).

The swinging operation unit 800 includes a pair of arm members 820 formed so as to be swingable (rotatable), and the pair of arm members 820 are placed between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. Operate (displace) with. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of arm members 820 are retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 11, the pair of arm members 820 have their tips overhanging in the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81).

The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 include a first engaging member 539 and a pair of second coupling members 630, respectively, and the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are shown in the figure. It is operated (displaced) between the retracted position shown in 9 and the coupling position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the first engaging member 539 is retracted to the back side of the composite operating unit 400, and the second coupling member 630 is retracted to the back side of the composite operating unit 400, which is visible to the player. It is considered impossible (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 12, the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81). Combined with each other.

The composite operation unit 400 includes four members (moving members 491 and 492) formed so as to be swingable (rotatable), and these four members (moving members 491 and 492) are retracted in the retracted position shown in FIG. And the overhanging position shown in FIG. 13 is operated (displaced). At the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the four members (operating members 491 and 492) are retracted to the side of the opening 211a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 210, and each of the two members is retracted to the side. They are arranged in a linearly aligned posture along the vertical direction. On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 13, the four members (moving members 491 and 492) have their tips extended into the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81). , Are arranged in a posture extending linearly from the center of the opening 211a.

The rotary operation unit 300 includes a rotary member 330 that is rotatably formed, and rotates the rotary member 330. As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the rotary member 330 of the rotary motion unit 300 is rotationally operated in a fixed position, and the motion members 491 and 492 of the composite motion unit 400 are in the overhang position or the retracted position. Since it is arranged in the foreground at any position, it is always visible to the player via the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

Since each of these operating units 300 to 800 is formed so as to be able to operate independently and is arranged in a stacked state as described above, the operating units 300 to 800 are among the operating units 300 to 800. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 10 to 13, each of the operation units 300 to 800 can be operated independently, and these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The rotary operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear view of the rotary operation unit 300.

As described above, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) at a position (overlapping position in the front view) corresponding to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 5). It is a staging member to be installed, and a reception entrance 361 is opened in the center of the front, and a ball won in the first winning opening 64 is received from the reception entrance 361 and guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) via a guide passage 380. do.

On the front side of the rotary operation unit 300, a rotary member 330 having an annular shape in front view and a decorative member 370 which is a decorative resin member are arranged, and a receiving port 361 is located at a substantially central portion of the rotary member 330. (Fixing member 360) is arranged. The rotating member 330 is rotatably formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and the lighting and blinking of the LED arranged on the back side thereof is transmitted to the front side, and the rotating member 330 is rotated by itself to win the first prize. A predetermined effect is performed around the mouth 64 (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 5).

16 and 17 are an exploded front perspective view of the rotational operation unit 300, which is a front view of the disassembled rotational operation unit 300. Note that FIG. 16 shows a state in which only the rotating member 330 is disassembled. Further, in FIG. 17, the decorative member 370 is not shown, and a part of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the rotary operation unit 300 has a case body 310 forming a skeleton on the rearmost side thereof, an illuminated base 320 fixed to the case body 310, and the front surface of the illuminated base 320. A rotary member 330 arranged on the side, a plurality of gears (first gear 351 and second gear 352 and third gear 353) for transmitting the rotary drive force of the drive motor 340 to the rotary member 330, and them. It mainly includes a fixing member 360 for fixing the first gear 351 of the plurality of gears to the case body 310, and a decorative member 370 arranged around the case body 310.

The case body 310 has an illuminated base mounting portion 311 formed in a substantially annular shape in a front view corresponding to the illuminated base 320, and a gear mounting portion formed so as to be retracted to the rear side of the illuminated base mounting portion 311. The 312 mainly includes a mounting base 313 extending outward from the outer edge of each of the illumination base mounting portion 311 and the gear mounting portion 312, and these are integrally formed from the resin material.

An illumination base 320 is fastened and fixed to the illumination base mounting portion 311 on the front side, and a decorative member 370 is fastened and fixed on the outer peripheral side by fastening screws. The gear mounting portion 312 is formed by connecting three recesses having a substantially circular shape with a front view, which are recessed corresponding to the outer shapes of the first gear 351 to the third gear 353, and the first gear 351 is formed in each recess. The third gear 353 is housed (arranged), respectively.

An opening 311a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the illumination base mounting portion 311 above the portion of the gear mounting portion 312 in which the first gear 351 is housed. By forming the opening 311a in the case body 310, the rotating member 330 (fastened portion 333) is connected to the first gear 351 (fastening seat portion 351d) by the fastening screw from the back surface side of the case body 310 through the opening 311a. Can be fastened and fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being exposed on the front side of the rotating member 330 and improve its appearance.

In the gear mounting portion 312, a passage port 314, a fastened portion 315, an insertion portion 316, and a guide convex portion 317 are formed in a recess in which the first gear 351 is housed. The passage port 314 is a passage that communicates with the reception port 361 of the fixing member 360, and guides the ball that has flowed in from the reception port 361 of the fixing member 360 to the guide passage 380 formed on the back side of the case body 310.

The guide passage 380 is formed as a passage through which a ball can pass between the mounted member and the back surface of the case body 310 by mounting a member having a U-shaped cross section on the back surface of the case body 310. (See FIG. 15). The guide passage 380 communicates with the passage port 314 on the back surface of the case body 310 and extends downward.

An insertion hole is formed in the mounting pedestal 313, and the rotary operation unit 300 is second-coupled by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole to the front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600. It is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210 via the operating unit 600 (see FIGS. 9 and 42).

The fastened portion 315 is a portion (recessed portion in which a female screw is engraved on the inner circumference) for fastening and fixing the fixing member 360 to the gear mounting portion 312, and is left and right across the passage port 314. A pair is formed at asymmetric positions (see FIG. 18). The insertion portion 315 is for inserting a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the gear mounting portion 312 (case body 310) to the front case body 612 (see FIGS. 9 and 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 on the rear side. It is a through hole and is formed above the passage port 314.

The guide convex portion 317 is a rail-shaped portion for guiding the rotation of the first gear 351 and is projected from the front of the gear mounting portion 312 as a convex portion of an annular shape in the front view. A front view annular guide recess 351e corresponding to the guide portion 317 is recessed on the back surface of the first gear 351 (see FIG. 19), and the guide protrusion 317 is fitted into the guide recess 351e. , The rotation position of the first gear 351 with respect to the gear mounting portion 312 is defined.

Here, the gear mounting portion 312 is arranged at a position (eccentric position) in which the passage port 314 is deviated downward from the center in the front view circular region formed by being surrounded by the guide convex portion 317. , The fastened portion 315 is arranged on the left and right sides of the passing opening 314, and the insertion portion 316 is arranged above the passing opening 314. As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the case body 310 and the fixing member 360 while efficiently securing the space for fastening and fixing in the limited space.

In the gear mounting portion 312, a shaft portion 318 is projected from a recess in which the second gear 352 is housed. The shaft portion 318 is a shaft body for axially supporting the second gear 352, and is inserted into a shaft hole 352a formed in the center of the second gear 352. In the present embodiment, it is possible to omit providing a stopper for the second gear 352 at the tip of the shaft portion 318 inserted into the shaft hole 352a of the second gear 352. Details will be described later.

A drive motor 340 is arranged on the back surface of the gear mounting portion 312 at a position corresponding to a recess in which the third gear 353 is housed. The drive motor 340 is arranged with its drive shaft 340a protruding from the front surface of the gear mounting portion 312 (inside the recess in which the third gear 353 is housed), and the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a. To.

The illumination base 320 is formed in a front view annular shape and has a substrate portion 321 on which a plurality of LEDs 321a are mounted, and is arranged in front of the substrate portion 321 and has a plurality of front surfaces of the substrate portion 321. It is configured to include a partition portion 322 for partitioning the area.

Specifically, the partition portion 322 is provided with a predetermined distance between the inner edge ribs 322a and the outer edge ribs 322b extending along the inner and outer edges of the substrate portion 321 and the ribs 322a and 322b. An annular intermediate rib 322c formed concentrically and a plurality of radial ribs 322d extending radially outward from the center of each of the ribs 322a to 322c intersect in a grid pattern. Is arranged. The plurality of radial ribs 322d are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (approximately 30 degree intervals in the present embodiment).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the illumination base 320 is divided into a total of 24 regions, 12 on the inner peripheral side and 12 on the outer peripheral side, by the partition portion 322, and each of the partitioned regions is divided into each. One or two LEDs 321a are arranged. As a result, when each LED 321a is individually turned on or blinked, the difference in brightness between the area related to the lighting and blinking and the area not related to the lighting and blinking can be increased, and as a result, the staging effect is enhanced. be able to.

The rotating member 330 includes a front view annular rotating body 331 having an opening formed in the center, and a cylindrical outer wall portion 332 extending axially from the outer edge of the rotating body 331, which transmit light. It is integrally formed from a sex resin material. The inner diameter of the opening formed in the center of the rotating body 331 corresponds to the outer diameter of the fixing member 360, and in the assembled state, the fixing member 360 is housed in the opening of the rotating body 331 (see FIG. 14).

On the back surface of the rotating main body 331, the fastened portions 333 are formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment). The fastened portion 333 is a portion (recessed portion in which a female screw is engraved on the inner circumference) in which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the rotating main body 331 (rotating member 330) to the first gear 351 is fastened, and is a rotating main body. They are arranged at positions that are the same distance from the center of 331 and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

On the front surface of the rotating main body 331, a plurality of annular protrusions 331a to 331e formed in a front view annular shape and arranged concentrically, and radiating outward from the center of the annular protrusions 331a to 331e. A plurality of radial protrusions 331f extending linearly are provided. The plurality of radial protrusions 331f are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (approximately 30 degree intervals in the present embodiment). That is, in the present embodiment, the circumferential spacing of the radial protrusions 331f coincides with the circumferential spacing of the radial ribs 322d of the illumination base 320.

The rotating main body 331 is formed to have a uniform wall thickness (thickness dimension) as a whole, and in the portion where the annular protrusions 331a to 331e or the radial protrusions 331f are projected, the wall thickness (thickness dimension) is increased by the amount of the protrusion. The thickness dimension) is made thicker (larger). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for light to pass through the portions where the protrusions 331a to 331f are projected.

In this case, in the assembled state of the rotary operation unit 300, the outer edge rib 322b of the partition member 322 is located at the position corresponding to the annular protrusion 331e located on the outermost side in the radial direction (the position overlapping in the front view), and the annular protrusion 331d. The intermediate rib 322c of the partition member 322 is arranged at a position corresponding to the annular protrusion 331d and the annular protrusion 331c (the position where they overlap in the front view), which is located on the outer side in the radial direction. ..

As described above, in the rotating member 330, the region corresponding to each region partitioned by the partition member 322 of the illumination base 320 is partitioned by the protrusions 331a to 331f, so that each LED 321a of the illumination base 320 is partitioned. When each of the lights and blinks is individually turned on and blinked, the difference in brightness between the area related to the lighting and blinking and the area not related to the lighting and blinking can be increased, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the rotating member 330, the section of such a region is achieved by projecting the annular protrusions 331a to 331e and the radiation protrusions 331f from the front and increasing the thickness dimension. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to print or dispose of a separate member in front of the rotating member 330, and the entire rotating member 330 can be formed in a single color, thus reducing the product cost. Not only can it be done, but the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The inner diameter of the outer wall portion 332 of the rotating member 330 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the partition member 322 (outer edge rib 322b) of the illumination base 320. The structure is such that the partition member 322 of the illumination base 320 is internally fitted on the peripheral side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light of the LED 321a from leaking from the outer peripheral side of the partition member 322, and to efficiently irradiate the front side with the light. Further, when the rotating member 330 is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351, the partition member 322 is internally fitted to the outer wall portion 332, so that the inner fitting state is obtained so that the two are aligned. It can be rotated relative to each other. That is, each fastened portion 333 of the rotating member 330 can be aligned with each fastening seat portion 351d (insertion hole) of the first gear 351 by simply rotating both relative to each other, and the radial position can be adjusted. Since there is no need to do so, workability can be improved accordingly.

The first gear 351 has a front view annular first main body 351a having an opening in the center through which the fixing member 360 can be inserted, and teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a. The first flange portion 351c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a in a flange shape at a position on the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 with respect to the 351b and its teeth 351b, and the third flange portion thereof. A plurality of fastening seats 351d (three in this embodiment) protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than the 351c, and the first main body 351a. A guide recess 351e (see FIG. 19), which is recessed on the back side of the gear and into which the guide protrusion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted, is provided, and the fixing member 360 is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312. It is rotatably held between the fixing member 360 and the gear mounting portion 312.

Since the first gear 351 is formed by projecting the first flange portion 351c from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a, the rigidity of the first gear 351 can be increased by the first flange portion 351c. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first flange portion 351c is continuously provided on the axial end surface of the tooth 351b, the rigidity of the tooth 351b can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency and improve the durability of the teeth 351b and 352b by making the meshing state with the second gear 352 appropriate. Further, as described later, the first flange portion 351c also serves as a retaining part for the second gear 352, so that the parts for preventing the retaining part can be omitted and the cost of the parts can be reduced accordingly.

The fastening seat portion 351d is a portion to be fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating main body 331 (rotating member 330), and is arranged at a position corresponding to each fastened portion 333 of the rotating main body 331. That is, each fastening seat portion 351d is provided with an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastened portion 333, and the insertion hole is the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It is a position and is arranged at positions that are unevenly spaced in the circumferential direction. Therefore, since the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 can be fastened and fixed only at the phase position of 1, when assembling the rotating member 330 to the first gear 351, the operator makes a mistake in the circumferential position. It is possible to avoid assembling.

In order to enable fastening and fixing of the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 only at the phase position of 1, the insertion holes of the fastening seats 351 are necessarily provided at positions that are the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It does not have to be arranged. The insertion holes of the fastening seat portions 351 may be arranged at positions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at different distances from the center of the rotating main body 331.

However, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable to dispose the insertion hole of each fastening seat portion 351 at a position at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. That is, since the length dimension (overhang length) of each fastening seat portion 351d can be made the same, when the first gear 351 is injection-molded from a resin material, its formability can be improved. be.

Here, in order to fasten and fix the fastening screw from the back surface side of the case body 310 to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating member 330 via the insertion hole of the fastening seat portion 351d, it is necessary to form an opening 311a in the case body 310. There is. In this case, when the insertion holes of the fastening members 351 are arranged at different distances from the center of the first gear 351, the movement loci of the insertion holes are different, and the opening width of the opening 311a is increased accordingly. Therefore, since it is necessary to reduce the rigidity, according to the present embodiment, the movement loci of the insertion holes can be made the same, so that the opening width of the opening 311a can be minimized accordingly.

The second gear 352 has a second main body 352a having a circular front view, teeth 352b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second main body 352a, and a shaft hole 352c formed in the center of the second main body 352a. By inserting the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c, the shaft portion 318 is rotatably held by the gear mounting portion 312 in a state of being meshed with the first gear 351.

The third gear 353 has a third main body 353a having a circular front view, teeth 353b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and the front side (rotating member 330) of the third gear 353 with respect to the teeth 353b. A third flange portion 353c that projects in a flange shape from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a at a position (side) is provided, and the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 370 is fixed to the third main body 353a. It is held by the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 340 in a state of being meshed with the two gears 352.

Therefore, when the drive motor 340 is rotationally driven and the third gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 is rotated, and the rotation of the second gear 352 is the second. It is transmitted to the 1st gear 351 and the 1st gear 351 is rotated. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 340 is transmitted to the rotating member 330 which is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351 via the fastening seat portion 351d and the fastened portion 333, and the rotating member 330 is rotated.

As in the case of the first gear 351, the third gear 353 is formed so that the third flange portion 353c projects from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a. Therefore, the third gear 353 is formed by the third flange portion 353c. The rigidity of the can be increased. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the third flange portion 353c is continuously provided on the axial end surface of the tooth 353b, the rigidity of the tooth 353b can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency and improve the durability of the teeth 353b and 352b by making the meshing state with the second gear 352 appropriate. Further, as described later, the third flange portion 353c also serves as a retaining part for the second gear 352, so that the parts for preventing the retaining part can be omitted and the cost of the parts can be reduced accordingly.

The fixing member 360 is a columnar member for fixing the first gear 351 to the gear mounting portion 312, and includes a receiving port 361 and an insertion portion 362. The receiving port 361 is a passage that communicates with the first winning opening 64 when mounted on the game board 13, and guides the ball that has flowed in from the first winning opening 64 to the passing port 314 of the gear mounting portion 312. The insertion portion 362 is a through hole for inserting a fastening screw for fastening or inserting the fixing member 360 into the fastened portion 315 or the insertion portion 316 of the gear mounting portion 312.

18 (a) is a front view of the case body 310, and FIG. 18 (b) is a front view of the fixing member 360. Note that FIG. 18A shows a state in which the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 and the third gear 353 are arranged on the case body 310, and one of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353. The part is partially cross-sectionald.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the passage port 314 formed in the gear mounting portion 312 of the case body 310 is downward from the center of the first gear 351 (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18)). a) Arranged in a misaligned (eccentric) position (lower side). Therefore, in the annular region formed around the passage port 314, the gear mounting portion 312 has an upper width dimension (FIG. 18 (a) vertical dimension) of the passage port 314 as compared with a lower width dimension. Be widened.

Similarly, for the fixing member 360 that is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the first gear 351 and fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312, the receiving port 361 formed in the fixing member 360 is downward from the center of the fixing member 360 ( It is arranged so as to be displaced (eccentric) in FIG. 18 (b) lower side). Therefore, in the annular region formed around the receiving port 361, the fixing member 360 has a wider width dimension above the receiving port 361 (vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) than a lower width dimension. Will be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the passage port 314 and the reception port 361 are misaligned (eccentric), and a wide (increased width dimension) portion is formed in a part of the periphery (annular region) thereof. Since the insertion portions 316 and 362 are arranged (perforated) in the widened portion, it is possible to effectively utilize the limited space to drill a large-diameter hole, and even in such a case, the case body 310. And the rigidity of the fixing member 360 can be ensured.

That is, the insertion portions 316 and 362 are formed as holes through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the rotary operation unit 300 to the front case body 612 (see FIG. 9 or FIG. 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 can be inserted. Since it is a part and the weight to support it is large, a large diameter fastening screw is inserted, so it is necessary to form it as a hole with a relatively large diameter. By forming the (enlarged) portion, it is possible to efficiently secure a space for drilling a large-diameter hole by utilizing such a portion. On the other hand, even when such a large-diameter hole is drilled, the hole is drilled in a partially widened area, so that the rigidity can be ensured.

FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a support structure of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 and the third gear 353 by the case body 310, and corresponds to the arrow XIX directional view of FIG. In FIG. 19, the case body 310 is viewed in cross section, and a part of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 is partially viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first gear 351 is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312 by fitting the guide convex portion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the guide recess 351e recessed on the back surface side. To. Further, the first gear 351 is restricted from falling off from the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19) by the fixing member 360 fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312. On the other hand, the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 340. As the fixing method, for example, a press-fitting method or an adhesive method is exemplified.

In the second gear 352, the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c formed in the second main body 352a, so that the teeth 352b are the teeth 351b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353. , 353b is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312 in a state of being meshed with the gear mounting portion 312.

In this case, as described above, the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 have the first flange portion 351c and the third flange protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the first main body 351a and the third main body 353a. Each portion 353c is formed, and the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c project to a position where they overlap with the axial end surface of the second gear 352. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second gear 352 from coming out of the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19). As a result, it is not necessary to dispose the retaining component at the tip of the shaft portion 318, so that the number of components can be reduced and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, at the time of assembly, for the second gear 352, it is only necessary to insert the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c, and the step of mounting the retaining component can be omitted, so that the manufacturing cost is reduced accordingly. It can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the first flange portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the third flange portion 353c of the third gear 353 come into contact with the second gear 352 at two different points, so that the second gear 352 abuts in the axial direction. Not only can it be surely restricted from coming out of the gear, but it is also possible to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating while tilting with respect to the shaft portion 318. As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency and the durability by making the meshing state of the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 and the teeth 351b and 353b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 appropriate. In particular, since the two points in contact with the second gear 352 are set at positions where the phases are different by about 180 degrees, the above-mentioned effect can be exhibited more remarkably. The phases at the two locations are preferably set within the range of about 160 degrees to about 180 degrees.

Here, it is sufficient that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 project to the mountaintop side from the valleys of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353b. This is because if it is overhanging from the valleys of the teeth 351b and 353, it can come into contact with the end surface of the second gear 352 on the mountaintop side of the teeth 352b. Further, it is possible to suppress the materials required for forming the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c, thereby reducing the weight and the material cost. However, it is preferable that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c project radially outward from the mountaintop side of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353. This is because the inclination of the second gear 352 can be suppressed more reliably.

Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 30.

As described above, the composite operation unit 400 includes four members (moving members 491 and 492) (see FIGS. 7 and 13), and operates (displaces) each of these members (moving members 491 and 492). Consists of four units for. That is, the composite operation unit 400 is two units arranged in a vertical direction on the left side of the opening 211a and two units arranged in a vertical direction on the right side of the opening 211a in the front view of the rear case 210. It consists of two units. In this case, the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) each member (moving member 491, 492) is the same in each of the four units. Therefore, in the following, one of these four units will be used. (A unit arranged above the right side of the opening 211a, see FIGS. 7 and 13) will be referred to as a combined operation unit 400.

FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. 20, in the composite operation unit 400, operating members 491 and 492 are arranged on the front surface side of the mounting base 410, and the operating members 491 and 492 are made to perform opening / closing operation and rotation operation in a complex manner (FIG. 20). See 27). That is, the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged to face each other in a posture in which the longitudinal directions thereof are parallel to each other, and the operation of expanding / contracting the facing interval (opening / closing operation) and the base side arranged on the mounting base 410 are performed. An operation that rotates as a center (rotational operation) is formed in a feasible manner. A decorative member 411 formed as a decorative body is arranged on the front surface of the mounting base 410.

In the present embodiment, two types of operation modes (opening / closing operation and rotation operation) of the operating members 491 and 492 are formed so as to be able to be executed by one drive motor 430. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the drive motor 430 for the two types of operation modes, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. The detailed configuration of such a structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23.

FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400 with the disassembled combined operation unit 400 viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the combined operation unit 400 in a state where a part of the combined operation unit 400 is disassembled, and the configuration shown on the left side of FIG. 22 is viewed in front and is shown on the right side of FIG. 22. The configuration is viewed back. It should be noted that in FIGS. 21 and 22, the decorative member 411 is not shown, and in FIG. 22, the mounting base 410 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the combined operation unit 400 includes a mounting base 410 disposed on the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), a holding case 420 mounted on the mounting base 410, and a holding case 420 thereof. A plurality of gears rotatably supported by the drive motor 430 that generates a driving force for rotationally supporting the plurality of gears, and a back arm whose base end is rotatably supported by the holding case 420. The slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 narrowed between the body 471 and the front arm body 472 and the facing surfaces of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and their first. It mainly includes operating members 491 and 492 connected to the tips of the 1-pinion leg member 482 and the 2nd pinion leg member 483.

The holding case 420 includes a back case body 421 attached to the mounting base 410 and a front case body 422 arranged to face the front side of the back case body 421, and the back case body 421 and the front case body 422 are provided with each other. A plurality of gears are rotatably supported and housed in the internal space formed between the facing surfaces.

In the holding case 420, a drive motor 430 is arranged on the back side of the back case body 421, and three rotation shafts (deceleration shaft 425, first) are provided between the back case body 421 and the front case body 422 facing each other. The 1st shaft 426 and the 2nd shaft 427) are erected in a posture parallel to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430, respectively, and a plurality of gears are rotatably supported from the reduction shaft 425 to the 2nd shaft 427. The pinion gear 431 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430.

The plurality of gears are a reduction gear 441 pivotally supported by the reduction shaft 425, an opening / closing first gear 451 and a rotary first gear 461 pivotally supported by the first shaft 426, and an opening / closing gear pivotally supported by the second shaft 427. It consists of a second gear 452 and a rotary second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The reduction gear 441 includes a large-diameter gear 441a and a small-diameter gear 441b coaxially formed integrally with the large-diameter gear 441a, and transmits the rotation of the pinion gear 431 to the opening / closing first gear 451 while decelerating the rotation. .. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotary first gear 461, and the rotary second gear 462 will be described.

FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotary first gear 461, and the rotary second gear 462. The opening / closing first gear 451 is engraved over the entire circumference of the main body portion 451a, the insertion hole 451b which is formed through the main body portion 451a through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, and the insertion hole 451b. The teeth 451c to be provided, a pair of connecting protrusions 451d protruding from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body portion 451a and located sandwiching the insertion hole 451b, and a pair of connecting protrusions 451d formed through the main body portion 451a to the side of the insertion hole 451b. It is provided with a positioning hole 451e to be located.

The rotary first gear 461 is a gear that is arranged on the front side of the opening / closing first gear 451 and is pivotally supported by the first shaft 426 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) together with the opening / closing first gear 451. An insertion hole 461b that is formed through the main body portion 461a through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, a tooth 461c that is carved in a part of the outer circumference of the main body portion 461a centering on the insertion hole 461b, and a main body portion 451a. It is provided with a pair of connecting holes 461d which are formed through the insertion hole 461b and are located so as to sandwich the insertion hole 461b, and a detected portion 461e which is formed so as to project outward in the radial direction from the outer periphery of the main body portion 451a and is detected by an optical sensor.
In the main body portion 461a of the rotary first gear 461, the outer peripheral surface of the region excluding the formation region of the teeth 461c (that is, the teeth 461c are not formed) is a cylindrical surface centered on the axis of the insertion hole 461b (hereinafter, It is formed as a "cylindrical surface 461a1"). The outer diameter of the cylindrical surface 461a1 (distance from the axis of the insertion hole 461b) is smaller than the outer diameter of the tip circle of the tooth 461c and larger than the outer diameter of the tooth bottom circle of the tooth 461c. As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the rotary first gear 461 and the rigidity of the non-formed surface 462a1 formed portion of the rotary second gear 462 at the same time.

Further, a pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 are formed in the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 so as to be internally fitted, and the internal fitting allows the rotation to rotate with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451. The rotation position (phase) of the first gear 461 can be positioned, and both can be connected and integrally rotated in the same phase.

The opening / closing second gear 452 is engraved in a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 452a centering on the main body portion 452a, the insertion hole 452b which is formed through the main body portion 452a and through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and the insertion hole 452b. It is provided with a tooth 452c to be provided, a connecting protrusion 452d protruding from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body portion 452a, and a positioning hole 452e formed through the main body portion 452a.

The opening / closing second gear 452 is arranged with the back arm body 471 sandwiched between the back arm body 421 (that is, on the front side of the back arm body 471), and the shaft support of the back arm body 471. An insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported in a cylindrical portion erected along the hole 471a (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Further, the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 is connected to the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, and the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 452 is transmitted to the slide rack member 481 through this connection (FIG. 26).

The rotary second gear 462 is engraved in a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 462a centering on the main body portion 462a, the insertion hole 462b which is formed through the main body portion 462a and through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and the insertion hole 462b. A tooth 462c to be provided, a pair of connecting protrusions 462d protruding from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body portion 462a and having a hole formed through the inside, and a positioning hole 462e formed through the main body portion 452a. To be equipped with.

The main body portion 462a of the rotary second gear 462 is connected to both sides of the teeth 462c, and the outer peripheral surface of the region where the teeth are not formed (hereinafter referred to as “non-formed surface 462a1”) is on the insertion hole 462b side. It is formed as a curved surface that dents toward (that is, has a center of curvature on the outward side in the radial direction). Specifically, the curvature of the non-formed surface 462a1 is set to the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or a slightly smaller radius (that is, a slightly larger radius).

Further, the rotary second gear 462 is arranged on the front side (position overlapped in the axial direction) of the opening / closing second gear 452, but is in a state independent of the opening / closing second gear 452 (that is, in a different phase). It is pivotally supported by the second axis 427 (in a state where it can rotate relative to each other). Further, the rotary second gear 462 is connected to each other by fastening the fastening screw inserted into the hole of the connecting protrusion 462d to the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472, so that the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e are connected to each other. They are connected to each other. Therefore, the rotary second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471) can be integrally rotated in the same phase through such a connection.

In this way, since the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 is fastened and fixed to the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotary second gear 462, both are fastened via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e. The rotary second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 can be formed as an integral structure by connecting at a plurality of locations (two locations in the present embodiment). As a result, the rigidity of the rotary second gear 462 can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472.

Here, as will be described later, the rotary second gear 462 receives a reaction force from the rotary first gear 461 when the non-formed surface 462a1 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 (FIG. FIG. 28 to 30), it is necessary to secure the rigidity to withstand the reaction force. In this case, for example, if the rotary second gear 462 is thickened, the weight increases, and if a highly rigid material is used, the material cost increases.

On the other hand, according to the rotary second gear 462 of the present embodiment, the rigidity of the front arm body 472 can be used (that is, integrated with the front arm body 472) to increase the rigidity. It is not necessary to increase the wall thickness of the rotary second gear 462 or to use a highly rigid material. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the rotary second gear 462 while reducing the weight and cost of the rotary second gear 462.

In particular, the rotary second gear 462 has a position where the connecting protrusion 462d faces the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 across the non-formed surface 462a1 in the back surface side of the non-formed surface 462a1 (that is, in the assembled state). Since it is arranged in FIGS. 28 to 30), as will be described later, when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, the rotating first gear is formed. The rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the 461 can be effectively increased by using the rigidity of the front case body 472 or the like or the metal fastening screw. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotary second gear 462 and improvement of their durability.

Further, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the open / close first gear 451 and the open / close second gear 452. Therefore, as will be described later, when the rotation first gear 461 is rotated by a unit rotation angle, the rotation angle at which the rotation second gear 462 is rotated is the same as the unit rotation angle, and the opening / closing first gear 451 rotates. It coincides with the rotation angle at which the second rotary gear 462 is rotated.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 21 and 22. In the assembled state, the pinion gear 431 of the drive motor 430 is meshed with the large-diameter gear 441a of the reduction gear 441, and the small-diameter gear 441b of the reduction gear 441 is meshed with the opening / closing first gear 451. The opening / closing second gear 452 is meshed with the opening / closing second gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 is meshed with the rotating first gear 461 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, when the drive motor 430 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the opening / closing first gear 451 via the pinion gear 431 and the reduction gear 441, and the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated.

In this case, as described above, since the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are connected by the inner fitting of the connecting protrusion 451d into the connecting hole 461d, they can rotate integrally in the same phase. Will be done. That is, when the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated, the rotation first gear 461 is also rotated, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transferred to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the rotation of the rotating first gear 461 is rotated. It is transmitted to the second gear 462, respectively.

In this embodiment, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are independent of each other and can rotate relative to each other in different phases (see FIGS. 28 to 30). Therefore, while the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 integrally rotates the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461, the rotation driving force is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the rotation second gear is rotated. A state in which the rotational driving force is cut off can be formed on the two gears 462. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 is stopped and the opening / closing operation is executed. The details of such a structure and operation will be described later.

Positioning holes 421a and 421b are formed through the back case body 421 on the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, respectively. Further, the positioning holes 410a and 410b are formed through the mounting base 410 corresponding to the positioning holes 421a and 421b. That is, when the back case body 421 is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410, the positioning hole 410a is arranged at a position where the positioning hole 410a communicates with the positioning hole 421a, and the positioning hole 410b communicates with the positioning hole 421b.

In the present embodiment, by inserting a columnar jig into the positioning holes 421a and 421b and the positioning holes 451e, 452e and 462e of the gears 451 and 452e, respectively, the gears 451 and 452 with respect to the back case body 421 are inserted. , 461, 462 mounting position (phase), and the phase (rotation position) between the rotary first gear 461 and the open / close first gear 451 and the rotary second gear 462 and the open / close second gear 452 can be positioned. can. The method of such positioning will be described later.

The back arm body 471 is a member for transmitting the rotation of the rotary second gear 462 together with the front arm body 472 to the operating members 491 and 492 to rotate the operating members 491 and 492 (see FIG. 26). A shaft support hole 471a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, a plurality of insertion holes 471b through which fastening screws (not shown) are inserted (four in this embodiment), a first pinion leg member 482 and a second pinion. A plurality of (4 in this embodiment) shaft portions 471c that rotatably support each of the leg members 483 and a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471. It is provided with a guide concave groove 471d and a positioning hole 471e formed through the side of the shaft support hole 471a.

A collar 427a arranged in the back case body 421 is inserted into the shaft support hole 471a so that the back arm body 471 can rotate about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back case body 421. To. Further, the cylindrical portion forming the shaft support hole 471a by the inner peripheral surface is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the second opening / closing gear 452, and the second opening / closing gear 452 can be rotated by the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. Is supported by.

The positioning hole 471e is formed through the positioning hole 462 of the rotary second gear 462 and the positioning hole 452e of the opening / closing second gear 452, respectively. That is, as will be described later, when the front arm body 472 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the back arm body 471 and the rotary second gear 462 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the front arm body 472, the back arm body 471 is connected. The phase of the positioning hole 471e of the above and the positioning hole 462e of the rotary second gear 462 (rotational position about the second axis 427) is matched. On the other hand, in the opening / closing second gear 452, the insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm body 471, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is centered on the shaft support portion. When the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated relative to the 471 and placed at a predetermined rotation position, the positioning hole 452e of the opening / closing second gear 452 is provided with respect to the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 and the positioning hole 462e of the rotary second gear 462. , The phase (rotational position about the second axis 427) is matched.

The front arm body 472 can be fastened to the tip by a shaft support hole 472a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted and a fastening screw that protrudes toward the back arm body 471 and is inserted into the insertion hole 471b of the back arm body 471. A plurality of raised fastening portions 472b (4 in this embodiment) formed in the above, a plurality of receiving recesses 472c (4 in this embodiment) which are recesses capable of receiving the tip of the shaft portion 471c, and a U-shaped cross section. A guide concave groove 472d extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the front arm body 472 as a concave groove, and a guide concave groove 472d arranged across the shaft support hole 472a and connected to a connecting protrusion 462d of the rotary second gear 462 ( It is provided with a connecting protrusion 472e to be fastened and fixed).

A collar 422a arranged in the front case body 422 is inserted into the shaft support hole 472a, whereby the front arm body 472 can rotate about the second shaft 427 with respect to the front case body 422. To. That is, since the front arm body 472 is connected to the rotary second gear 462 via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e, the rotary second gear 462 receives the rotary drive force from the rotary first gear 461 and is second. When rotated around the shaft 427, the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471 connected to the front arm body 472) is also rotated around the second shaft 427 together with the rotating second gear 462.

In the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 471b of the back arm body 471 is fastened to the raised fastening portion 472 of the front arm body 472, whereby the front surface of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 471 are fastened. It is connected to the back surface of the body 472 in a posture facing each other. In this case, a gap (space) corresponding to the protruding height of the raised fastening portion 472b is formed between the two facing surfaces (front surface and back surface). Therefore, the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 can be displaceably arranged by utilizing this gap.

The slide rack member 481 transmits the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 452 together with the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 to the operating members 491 and 492 to open and close the operating members 491 and 492. It is a member (see FIGS. 26 and 27), and is formed at one end of a long main body portion 481a, a rack portion 481b formed as rack gears on both left and right sides of the main body portion 481a, and a main body portion 481a in the longitudinal direction. It is provided with a connecting groove 481c and a guide convex portion 481d projecting from the front surface and the back surface of the main body portion 481 in a substantially rectangular cross section and extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a.

As described above, the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is a groove through which the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 is inserted, and the connecting protrusion 452d has a slidable groove width and the main body portion 481. It extends linearly along the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of. Further, in the assembled state of the slide rack member 481, the guide convex portion 481d is inserted into the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Therefore, the direction in which the slide rack member 481 can slide and move with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 is the extending direction of the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472). (Direction) is regulated (see FIG. 26).

The first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 have shaft support holes 482b and 483b formed through the main body portions 482a and 483a and one end of the main body portions 482a and 483a in the longitudinal direction, and the shaft support holes 482b. , 483b are formed as a pinion gear centered on the gear portions 482c and 483c, and the connecting holes 482d and 483d formed through the other ends of the main body portions 482a and 483a in the longitudinal direction. The gear portions 482c and 483c are arranged on both the left and right sides of the 481 in a state of being meshed with the rack portion 481b of the slide rack member 481.

The shaft support holes 482b and 483b are holes through which the shaft portion 471c of the back arm body 471 is inserted and pivotally supported in the assembled state, whereby the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are formed. It is rotatable with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 around the shaft support holes 482b and 483b (shaft portion 471c). Therefore, by sliding the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second through the teeth of the rack portion 481b and the gear portions 482c and 483c. The pinion leg member 483 can be rotated.

A plurality of operating members 491 and 492 are formed in a columnar shape from the back surface side thereof and can be inserted into the connecting holes 482d and 483d of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 (four in this embodiment). ), The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are provided. The protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed so that the fastening screws can be fastened. Therefore, the protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are inserted into the connecting holes 482d and 483d, and the fastening screw is fastened to the protruding tips from the side opposite to the insertion direction, whereby the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second The operating members 491 and 492 are connected to the pinion leg member 483.

The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed with rib-shaped portions protruding from the outer peripheral surface excluding the protruding tip, and the end faces of the rib-shaped portions are the first pinion leg members 482 and the second pinion. It abuts on the front of the leg member 483. As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 can be arranged at positions raised from the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 by the amount of the protruding heights of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. Therefore, even in a structure in which the front arm body 472 is arranged between the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, the second pinion leg member 483, and the operating members 491 and 492, the front arm body 472 interferes with the slide rack member 481. It is possible to open and close the operating members 491 and 492 without doing so.

A urging spring 484 made of a coil spring is arranged between the pair of first pinion leg members 482 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 484 is applied to the pair. The first pinion leg member 482 is configured to act in a direction close to each other. As a result, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening / closing operation, the urging force of the urging spring 484 is used to bring the operating members 491 and 492 into close contact with each other to form a gap. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, a method for positioning the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotary first gear 461, and the rotary second gear 462 will be described. In the description of the positioning method, FIGS. 21 to 23 will be referred to as appropriate.

24 and 25 describe in chronological order the process of assembling the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427. It is a partially enlarged front view of the composite operation unit 400. In FIG. 24 (a), the state in which the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction gear 425 is further opened / closed in the first shaft 426 with respect to the state shown in FIG. 24 (a) in FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 25A, the state in which the first gear 451 is assembled is that the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are further assembled in the second shaft 427 with respect to the state shown in FIG. 24B. In FIG. 25 (b), a state in which the rotary first gear 461 is further assembled to the first shaft 426 is shown with respect to the state shown in FIG. 25 (a).

Here, as described above, the combined operation unit 400 sequentially transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 to the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 via the reduction gear 441, thereby opening and closing the second gear. The slide rack member 481 is displaced by the rotation of the gear 452 to open and close the operating members 491 and 492, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 is transmitted to the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 via the reduction gear 441. The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotated by the rotation of the rotating second gear 462, and the operating members 491 and 492 are rotated.

Therefore, in order to properly perform the opening / closing operation and the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, avoiding interference between the members and the occurrence of deviation of the moving range), the opening / closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451 The rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the second gear 461 and the rotation position of the second rotation gear 462 with respect to the first rotation gear 461 are positioned at predetermined rotation positions, and then each of these gears 451 to 462 is a holding case. It needs to be assembled to each 420.

However, in a conventional gaming machine, in order to assemble these two gears after positioning the rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the other gear with respect to one gear in this way, the operator rotates both gears. Since it was necessary to visually adjust the position and assemble, the work was complicated, and not only the work efficiency was poor, but also there was a risk of assembly failure.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative rotation positions (phase, meshing position) of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461, respectively. A positioning structure for positioning the mounting position (phase) of the gears 451, 452, 461, 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is provided, and by using this positioning structure, when each gear 451 to 462 is assembled to the holding case 420, It is configured so that it is possible to avoid the occurrence of assembly defects while improving the workability.

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 24A, the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction shaft 425 and meshed with the pinion gear 431. As described above, since the positioning holes 421a and 421b of the back case body 421 are communicated with the positioning holes 410a and 410b (see FIG. 21) of the mounting base 410, the positioning holes 410a are connected from the back side of the mounting base 410. A jig (not shown) is inserted into each of the and 410b, and the jig is projected from the positioning holes 421a and 421b toward the front side of the back case body 421. The jig is formed as a columnar body having a circular cross section having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 410a or the like.

Next, the opening / closing first gear 451 is assembled (shaft-supported) to the first shaft 426 while the jig protruding from the positioning hole 421a of the back case body 421 is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the opening / closing first gear 451. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24B, the opening / closing first gear 451 can be meshed with the reduction gear 441, and the mounting position (phase) of the opening / closing first gear 451 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned. ..

While maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (the state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the opening / closing first gear 451), the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are then placed. Assemble to 2-axis 427 (support the axis).

The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are operated in a state of being integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. That is, in the opening / closing second gear 452, the insertion hole 452 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm body 471, and in the rotary second gear 462, the connecting protrusion 462d thereof is the connecting protrusion 472e of the front arm body 472. The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are interposed between the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 in a state of being fastened and fixed. Further, the jig inserted into the positioning hole 421b of the back case 421 is projected from the surface of the back case 421 to a height position where it can be inserted into the positioning hole 462e of the rotary second gear 462.

In this case, when assembling the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 to the second shaft 427, the jig protruding from the positioning hole 421b of the back case body 421 is used as the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471. The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are assembled (shaft-supported) to the second shaft 427 while being sequentially inserted into the positioning hole 452e of the two gears 452 and the positioning hole 462e of the rotary second gear 462. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25A, the opening / closing second gear 452 is meshed with the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the opening / closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451. Can be positioned, and the mounting position (phase) of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned.

While maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (at least the state in which the gear is inserted into the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471), finally, the opening / closing position supported by the first shaft 426 is The rotating first gear 461 is assembled (shaft-supported) to the first shaft 426 while the connecting protrusion 451d of the one gear 451 is inserted into the connecting hole 461d of the rotating first gear 461. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25B, the rotary first gear 461 is meshed with the rotary second gear 462, and the mounting position (phase) of the rotary second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is positioned. Can be done.

After the rotary first gear 461 is attached to (shaft-supported) the first shaft 426, the jig is pulled out from the back side of the back case body 421. As a result, the assembly (shaft support) of the gears 451 to 462 to the back case body 421 (first shaft 426 and second shaft 427) is completed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the jigs are erected in parallel to the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 of the back case body 421, and the gears are inserted into the positioning holes 451e and the like. By assembling (shafting) 451 to 462 to the first shaft 426, the second shaft 427, etc. in order, the rotation positions (phase, meshing position) of each gear 451 to 462 are positioned with reference to the back case body 421. can do. That is, since the jig can be inserted at the same time as the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are inserted into the gears 451 to 462, the assembling work and the positioning work can be performed at the same time, and the workability is improved. Can be planned.

In particular, with respect to the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462, since the positioning hole 452e of the opening / closing second gear 452 is formed as a through hole, the second shaft of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462. Assembling to 427 (shaft support) can be performed at the same time. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 is formed as a through hole, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. It can be assembled (supported by the axis) to the second axis 427 with. Therefore, it is not necessary to assemble each arm body 471, 472 and each gear 452, 462 while positioning them, and the positioning work can be completed by one assembling work, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated jig for each of the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotary second gear 462, the back arm body 471, and the front arm body 472, and a common jig is used. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. In addition,
The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 need to be able to rotate relative to each other independently of each other. The 462 can be independently rotatable. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a rotating shaft for each of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, and these opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are used as a common rotating shaft (second shaft 427). Since it can be supported by an axis, the product cost can be reduced from this point as well.

On the other hand, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 need to be connected to each other and rotate integrally in the same phase. In this case, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are formed by inserting (internally fitting) the pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 into the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461. By connecting these two gears 451 and 461 to each other, positioning of the rotation position (phase) and integral rotation in the same phase are possible at the same time. That is, the positioning of the rotation position (phase) of the two gears 451 and 461 and the connection between the two gears 451 and 461 for integrated rotation can be shared by the connecting protrusion 451d and the communication hole 461d, and the rotation can be performed. It is not necessary to separately provide a through hole for positioning (that is, inserting a jig) and a connecting structure for integral rotation. As a result, the shapes of the double gears 451 and 461 can be simplified and the manufacturing yield can be improved. Further, since the number of through holes formed through the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be suppressed, the rigidity can be ensured and the durability can be improved accordingly.

In particular, a pair of communication holes 461d are formed as through holes in the rotary first gear 461, and a pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 are inserted (internally fitted) into the pair of communication holes 461d. Therefore, the rigidity of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be improved by the fitting structure.

Here, according to the positioning structure of the present embodiment, as described above, the jig is projected from the front surface of the back case body 421, and the gears 451 to 462 are sequentially positioned while positioning the rotation position using the jig. When assembled (shaft-supported) to the first shaft 426, the second shaft 427, etc., the jig can be removed from the back surface of the back case body 421 after the assembly of all the gears 451 to 462 is completed. That is, when assembling each of the gears 451 to 462, each of the gears 451 to 462 while maintaining the state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning holes 451e to 462e of the already assembled gears 451 to 462. Assembling work of the remaining gears 451 to 461 among the gears 451 to 462 can be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operator from inadvertently rotating the gears 451 to 461 that have already been assembled during the work, so that workability can be improved and the reliability of the positioned rotation position can be improved. It is possible to improve the sex.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are arranged coaxially with the first shaft 426, and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are arranged coaxially with the second shaft 427. Therefore, backlash between the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 and backlash between the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be generated in the same direction. .. As a result, as will be described later, when the operating members 491 and 492 are opened and closed and rotated (see FIGS. 27 to 30), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the effect timing.

Next, the opening / closing operation of the operating members 491 and 492 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. 26 (a) to 26 (c) are exploded front views of the combined operation unit 400 for explaining the relative displacement state of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471. The state in which the operating members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is shown. In FIG. 26 (a), the opening / closing second gear 452 opens / closes counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 26 (b), and FIG. 26 (c) opens / closes with respect to FIG. 26 (b). The second gear 452 corresponds to a state in which the second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise).

As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), a cylindrical portion (see FIGS. 21 and 22) of the back case body 271 is inserted through the insertion hole 452b of the opening / closing second gear 452. As a result, the opening / closing second gear 452 is made relatively rotatable about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back case 271.

As described above, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are urged in a direction close to each other by the urging force of the urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) erected between them. The shaft support hole 482b is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 471c of the arm body 471. That is, by receiving the urging force of the urging spring 484, the first pinion leg member 482 located on the right side of FIG. 26B of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 is counterclockwise around the shaft portion 471c. While rotated (counterclockwise), the first pinion leg member 482 located on the left side of FIG. 26B is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the shaft portion 471c. Therefore, the slide rack member 481 has the guide recesses 471d and 472d of both arm bodies 471 and 472 (FIGS. 21 and 22) due to the urging force of the urging spring 484 acting through the rotation of the pair of first pinion leg members 482. (See), the slide is displaced downward (in the direction away from the opening / closing second gear 452, the lower side in FIG. 26B).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26B, in a state where the opening / closing second gear 452 is not rotated against the urging force of the urging spring 484, the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 slides. The distance L1 is defined as the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 26B), which is attracted downward by the rack member 481 (lower side in FIG. 26B). .. Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, the distance between the connecting holes 482d is set to the distance W1.

From the state shown in FIG. 26B, for example, when the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second axis 427 with respect to the back arm body 471, the connecting protrusion 452d is generated. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d causes the slide rack member 481 to move upward (upper side in FIG. 26A) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Slide and displace.

That is, as shown in FIG. 26A, when the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 26A) The distance between them is shortened to the distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. With the upward slide displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in a direction in which they are separated from each other, and the distance between the connecting holes 482d is expanded to be the distance W2. (W1 <W2).

The pair of second pinion leg members 483 is also the same as the pair of first pinion leg members 482, and in the state shown in FIG. 26B, the postures in which they are close to each other (the distance between the connecting holes 483d). Is arranged in the minimum state), and in the state shown in FIG. 26 (a), with the upward slide displacement of the slide rack member 481, the posture of being separated from each other (the distance between the connecting holes 483d is the maximum). Is placed in the state of

From the state shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second axis 427 with respect to the back arm body 471, the state shown in FIG. 26 (b). Will be returned to. From the state shown in FIG. 26B, when the opening / closing second gear 452 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second axis 427 with respect to the back arm body 471, the connecting protrusion 452d slides. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d slides the slide rack member 481 upward (upper side in FIG. 26C) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace. As a result, when the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position as in the case shown in FIG. 26 (a), the direction of slide displacement (FIG. 26 (c)) as shown in FIG. 26 (c). The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second axis 427 in the vertical direction) is shortened to the distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. To. With the upward sliding displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 (and the second pinion leg member 483) are rotated in directions away from each other and between their connecting holes 482d. The spacing is expanded to the spacing W2 (W1 <W2).

Next, the rotation operation and the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 by the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30.

27 (a) to 27 (d) are front views of the combined operation unit 400 in which the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operating members 491 and 492 are illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 27 (a), the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged and opened at the ascending position U, and in FIG. 27 (b), the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged and closed at the ascending position U. In FIG. 27 (c), the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged and closed at the descending position D, and in FIG. 27 (d), the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged and closed at the descending position D. The opened state is shown in each figure.

28 to 30 are composite operation units schematically illustrating the meshing state of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the meshing state of the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of 400. 28 (a) is in the state of FIG. 27 (a), FIGS. 28 (b) and 29 (a) are in the state of FIG. 27 (b), and FIG. 29 (b) is in the state of FIG. 27 (b) and FIG. The transition states between FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a) correspond to the states of FIG. 27 (c), and FIGS. 30 (b) correspond to the states of FIG. 27 (d). do. Further, FIGS. 28 (b) and 29 (a) and FIGS. 29 (c) and 30 (a) show the same state, respectively.

Here, in FIGS. 28 to 30, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIGS. 28 to 30, one of the connecting protrusions 451d of the pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the connecting holes 461d of the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461. A hatching is attached to each of the 461d, and the connecting protrusion 451d and the connecting hole 461d having the hatching will be described as a reference for rotation angles θ0 to θ4, which will be described later. That is, in the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotary first gear 462, the hatched connecting protrusion 451d is inserted (internally fitted) into the hatched connecting hole 461d, and these are arranged at the same rotational position.

Further, in FIGS. 28 to 30, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 in a state where the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the raised position U and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27A). The position is the rotation angle θ0, and the rotation positions of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 in the state where the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the ascending position U and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27B). The opening / closing first gear in the state where the rotation angle θ1 and the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged and closed between the ascending position U and the descending position D (the state between FIGS. 27B and 27C). The rotation position of the 451 and the rotation first gear 461 is the rotation angle θ2, and the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing first gear 451 in a state where the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the lowering position D and are closed (the state shown in FIG. 27C). The rotation position of the rotation first gear 461 is the rotation angle θ3, and the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first in a state where the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the lowering position D and are open (the state shown in FIG. 27D). The rotation position of one gear 461 is defined as a rotation angle θ4, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), when the rotation positions of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are at the rotation angle θ0, the operating members 491 and 492 move to the ascending position U. It is placed and opened. That is, the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) to a predetermined rotation position with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 around the second shaft 427, and the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 are rotated. By shortening the distance between them to the distance L2, the slide rack member 481 is brought into a state of being slid-displaced upward (in a direction close to the second axis 427) (state shown in FIG. 26C).

In this case, in the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the main body portion 462a of the rotary second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body portion 461a of the rotary first gear 461. .. As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) is formed as a cylindrical surface centered on the first shaft 426, and the rotary second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is not formed. The surface 462a1 is a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 insertion hole 462b (that is, has a center of curvature on the first shaft 426 side) and has the same curvature or slightly as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461. It is formed as a curved surface with a small curvature (ie, a slightly larger radius).

Therefore, the second shaft 427 of the rotary second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotary second gear 462) due to the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1. It is impossible to rotate around. That is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 are used as stopper means for restricting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 around the second shaft 427 (that is, holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the ascending position U). Can be made to work.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine, an operating member rotatably arranged and a drive motor that applies a rotational driving force to the operating member are provided, and the operating member is rotated by a rotational driving force of the drive motor. Some rotate within a range. In this case, for example, when the end of the rotation range of the operating member is set as the ascending position and gravity is applied to the operating member arranged at the end of the rotating range, the operating member rotates (descends) due to the action of gravity. You need to avoid it. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the driving force of the driving motor is made to oppose gravity (weight of the operating member) to regulate the rotation (descending) of the operating member (that is, the operating member is held at the end of the rotation range). ) Due to the structure, the energy consumption required to hold the operating member is high.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (rising position U), the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the rotation second of the rotation first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) are arranged. By abutting the non-formed surface 462a1 of the gear 462 (main body portion 462a), the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (rotational motion of the rotating second gear 462) can be regulated. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (rising position U), the operating members 491 and 492 and the drive motor 430 are separated from each other. Where it becomes impossible to hold the operating members 491 and 492 at the ascending position U by using the rotational driving force, the machine uses the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 to move the operating members 491 and 492 to the ascending position U. Can be held. As a result, the energy consumption required for holding the operating members 491 and 492 can be suppressed.

In this case, when the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) are in contact with each other (that is, the operating member 4911). When the 492 is placed in the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later), it is possible to regulate the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise) about the second axis 427. Since the rotating second gear 462 is formed in a flexible shape, the rotation around the second axis 427 of the rotating second gear 462 is performed in only one direction (that is, the direction in which the operating members 491 and 492 are lowered toward the lowering position D by the action of gravity. Compared to the case where it is formed into a shape that can be regulated by (only), the vibrations of the operating members 491 and 492 when reaching the end of the movement range (rising position U (and descending position D described later)) are converged. , The operating members 491 and 492 can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range. Further, since the operating members 491 and 492 can be held in a stable state at the end of the moving range, the operating members 491 and 492 that should be in the stopped state at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later) are subjected to an external force (for example,). , Vibration and misalignment due to external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine) can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is in contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) (that is, the operating member 491). , 492 are arranged in the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later)), and are curved in an arc shape about the rotation axis (first axis 426) of the rotation first gear 461. It is formed by being curved in an arc shape having the same diameter as or slightly larger than the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461.

As a result, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 can be smoothly brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461, and both can be easily brought into contact with each other by surface contact. As a result, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 are smoothly brought into contact with each other, and the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of the movement range (rising position U (and descending position D described later)) and are stopped. The impact can be relaxed, and the contact pressure between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 can be reduced to improve the durability of the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462.

Here, as described above, the rotary second gear 462 utilizes the rigidity of the front arm body 472 (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472) to increase its rigidity. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the wall thickness of the rotary second gear 462 or to use a high-rigidity material, whereby the durability of the rotary second gear 462 can be increased while reducing the weight and cost of the rotary second gear 462. Improvements are being made.

In particular, as described above, the rotary second gear 462 has a position where the connecting protrusion 462d faces the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 with the non-formed surface 462a1 on the back surface side (that is, the non-formed surface 462a1). ), The non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later). The rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first gear 461 can be effectively increased. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotary second gear 462 and improvement of their durability.

Further, the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotary second gear 462 is arranged at a position facing the rotary shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotary first gear 461 with the non-formed surface 462a1 interposed therebetween. That is, the non-formed surface 462a1 is arranged on a straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first axis 426. At the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later), when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1. Since the reaction force received from is applied along the straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426, the rotating second gear is located at a position facing the rotating shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461. By disposing the connecting protrusion 462d of the 462, the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 (cylindrical surface 461a1) can be further exhibited by utilizing the front arm body 472. Further, since the metal fastening screw is inserted through the rolling convex portion 462d, the rigidity can be increased in that respect as well.

From the state shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1, they rotate. Since the first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 slip (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462, the rotary first gear 461 The rotational driving force is not transmitted from the 461 to the rotary second gear 462, and the rotary second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 can be held at the ascending position U without performing the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, in a state where the rotational operation is stopped).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the rotary first gear 461, and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 is made to face the cylindrical surface 461a1 so that the above-mentioned cutoff state (rotational first gear) is formed. Since the structure forms a state in which the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the 1st gear 461 to the rotary 2nd gear 462), the rigidity of the rotary 1st gear 462 can be improved.

That is, even when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotary first gear 461 (the region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 is formed on the tooth tip surface of the teeth 461c. By sliding (sliding) facing each other, the above-mentioned cutoff state can be formed. However, in this case, the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is lowered due to the formation (concave) of the teeth 461c. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed in the region facing the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (the teeth 451c are not formed), so that the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is formed accordingly. It is possible to improve the rigidity of the.

Further, when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotary first gear 461 (the region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 is the tooth 461c of the rotary first gear 461. It is necessary that the tooth tip surface is retracted to the side of the second axis 427. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-formed surface 462a1 formed portion of the rotating second gear 462 becomes large, and the rigidity thereof is lowered by that amount.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the rotary first gear 461, and the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed between the tooth tip surface and the tooth bottom surface of the tooth 451c as described above. Therefore, the amount of retreat of the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be reduced. As a result, the protrusion amount of the non-formed surface 462a1 formed portion of the rotating second gear 462 is secured (suppressing that the retreat amount becomes large), and the rigidity of the non-formed surface 462a1 formed portion of the rotating second gear 462 is secured. Can be improved.

In particular, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 is formed as a curved surface recessed toward the second axis 427 side (that is, having the center of curvature on the first axis 426 side) as described above, and the teeth 462c. The cylindrical surface of the rotary first gear 461 is formed so as to project forward (that is, the shape in which the distance from the second shaft 427 increases) as the distance from the rotary first gear 461 increases in the circumferential direction. While allowing sliding (formation of a cutoff state) with respect to 461a1, the amount of protrusion in the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the rotary second gear 462 can be increased to further increase its rigidity.

Since the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 are meshed with the teeth 451c and 452c of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotary first gear 461 Are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the opening / closing second gear 452 becomes the back arm body 471 and It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the front arm body 472 about the second axis 427.

As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is expanded to the distance L1, and the slide rack member 481 is slid downward (in the direction away from the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26 (b)). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b) and 29 (a), the open operating members 491 and 492 can be brought into a closed state. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the ascending position U, the opening and closing operation can be executed to close the open operating members 491 and 492.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b) and 29 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ1, and the operating members 491 and 492 are raised to the rising positions U. In the arranged and closed state, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 reaches the end of the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, 462c is considered to be in the state just before the tooth alignment.

Therefore, from the states shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b), and 29 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally changed from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase. When rotated toward, the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 are aligned with the teeth 461c and 462c of the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462, whereby the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 are engaged with each other. The rotation of 461 is transmitted to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 is integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 and rotated clockwise (rightward) around the second axis 427. .. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the operating members 491 and 492 can be rotated from the ascending position U to the descending position D.

On the other hand, as described above, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are similarly rotated. It is rotated integrally in phase. That is, the opening / closing second gear 452 does not rotate relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and as shown in FIG. 29B, these rotating second gear 462, the back arm body 471, and the back arm body 472 The front arm body 472 and the front arm body 472 are integrally rotated around the second axis 427 in the same phase. That is, the opening / closing operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped (the operating members 491 and 492 are held in the closed state).

As a result, when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are further rotated from the rotation angle θ2, the rotating operation is executed while keeping the operating members 491 and 492 in the closed state, and the opening / closing first operation is performed. When the gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 reach the rotation angle θ3, as shown in FIGS. 27 (c) and 29 (c), the operating members 491 and 492 arranged at the ascending position U are moved to the descending position D. Can be placed in.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a), when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ3, the operating members 491 and 492 are It is placed in the descending position D and is in a closed state. In this case, the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 are disengaged from each other's teeth 461c and 462c, and the rotary second gear 462 is formed on the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body portion 461a of the rotary first gear 461. The non-formed surface 462a1 in the main body portion 462a of the above is abutted.

That is, the meshing of the mutual teeth 461c and 462c of the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 is released (it is considered that the meshing is impossible), so that the rotary first gear 461 to the rotary second gear 462. It is possible to cut off the transmission of the rotational driving force to (form a cut-off state) to stop the rotation of the rotary second gear 462 (that is, the rotary operation of the operating members 491 and 492).

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the operating member is stopped, a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of the gear that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor to the operating member is provided, and the sensor device causes the gear to reach a predetermined rotational position. When it is detected that it has been rotated, or when the drive amount (number of rotations or steps) of the drive motor is detected (counted) and the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the operating members move. It was judged that the end of the range had been reached, and the drive of the drive motor was stopped. In this case, for example, the drive motor may not be stopped even though the operating member has reached the end of the movement range due to a failure in detecting the rotation position or the drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the movement range of the moving member, and when the drive motor is not properly stopped, the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper. However, in such a structure in which the movement of the operating member is restricted by the stopper, when the operating member collides with the stopper, not only the operating member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the drive motor. It may act and cause damage to the drive motor.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of the moving range (descending position D), the meshing of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is changed. It can be released (as disengaged) to block the transmission of rotational driving force from the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to the operating members 491 and 492 (rotary second gear 462). As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped even when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 continues to be generated.

As a result, damage due to collision between the operating members 491 and 492 and other members can be avoided. Further, even if the operating members 491 and 492 collide with other members, the operating members 491 and 492 are separated from the drive motor 430 (that is, the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462). Since the drive motor 430 is in a state of idling, it is possible to avoid an excessive load acting on the drive motor 430. As will be described later, the same applies to the case where the operating members 491 and 492 are rotated from the descending position D toward the ascending position U and reach the ascending position U.

As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 are formed as curved surfaces having shapes corresponding to each other. Therefore, the second shaft 427 of the rotary second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotary second gear 462) due to the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1. It is impossible to rotate around. That is, the stopper means that allows the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 to regulate the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second axis 427 (that is, the operating members 491 and 492 can be held at the descending position D). Can function as.

From the states shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c), and 30 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4. When rotated, the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 slip (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462. Therefore, the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the rotary first gear 461 to the rotary second gear 462, and the rotary second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. As a result, the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped (that is, the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the descending position D).

On the other hand, in the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, since the teeth 451c and 452c of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 are meshed with each other, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the first rotation When the gear 461 is integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4 in the same phase, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is the back arm body. It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the 471 and the front arm body 472 about the second axis 427.

As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is shortened to the distance L2, and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction closer to the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26 (c)). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 30 (b), the closed operating members 491 and 492 can be brought into an open state. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the descending position D, the opening and closing operation can be executed to open the closed operating members 491 and 492.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 30 (b), after the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the descending position D and are in the open state, the drive motor 430 (FIGS. 21 and 22) is then placed. (See) is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case, and the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ4 to the rotation angle θ0. The operations (open / close operation and rotation operation) can be executed in reverse order.

That is, from the state of the rotation angle θ4 shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 30 (b), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated to the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a), the slip between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462. Using (sliding), while stopping the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the descending position D), the opening / closing second gear 452 is clockwise (clockwise). ), The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be expanded to the distance L1, and the open operating members 491 and 492 can be closed. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the descending position D, the opening and closing operation can be executed to close the open operating members 491 and 492.

Next, from the state of the rotation angle θ3 shown in FIGS. 27 (c) and 29 (c) and FIG. 30 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrated in the same phase through the rotation angle θ2. Rotate to the rotation angle θ1. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (b) and 29 (a), the rotary second gear 462 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) integrally with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and the operating member. While rotating 491 and 492 from the descending position D to the ascending position U, the opening / closing second gear 452 does not rotate relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and is combined with the rotating second gear 462. The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can be integrally rotated in the same phase with respect to the second axis 427. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the closed state, the rotational operation can be executed and the operating members 491 and 492 arranged at the descending position D can be arranged at the ascending position U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when starting the rotational operation for moving the operating members 491 and 492 from the descending position D to the ascending position U, only the opening and closing operations of the operating members 491 and 492 are performed first. After that, the moving members 491 and 492 are rotated. That is, after forming a cutoff state in which the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is blocked from being transmitted to the rotary second gear 462, the rotary drive force of the drive motor 430 is applied to the rotary second gear. Since the transmission state to be transmitted to 462 is formed, the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 to start the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be suppressed, and as a result, the drive motor 430 is miniaturized. be able to.

That is, when the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 in the stopped state (that is, the ascending position U or the descending position D) is started, the stationary object is moved. It is necessary to apply a force exceeding the generated inertial force to the operating members 491 and 492, and the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 becomes large. In particular, the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 992 is performed not only by the operating members 491 and 492, but also by a mechanism portion (for example, a slide rack member 481 and each pinion leg member 482, 483) that opens and closes the operating members 491 and 492. Etc.) and the entire arm body 471, 472 that holds the mechanical part must be moved, and the inertial force at the start of the rotational operation becomes large. Further, when rotating the operating members 491 and 492 at the descending position D toward the ascending position D, it is necessary to resist the weight (action of gravity) of the operating members 491 and 492 in addition to the inertial force. .. Therefore, the size of the drive motor 430 is increased.

On the other hand, after the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 is started, the action of inertia that tries to maintain the moving state of the operating members 491 and 492 acts, so that the rotation required for the drive motor 430 is required. The driving force is smaller than the rotational driving force required to start the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492. In other words, after the movement of the operating members 491 and 492 is started, it can be said that the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is in use.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, first, the rotational driving force is utilized by utilizing the slip (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462. The drive motor 430 can be rotationally driven in a state in which is not transmitted to the rotary second gear 462 (a cutoff state, a state during the transition from FIG. 30B to FIG. 30A). It is possible to give momentum (inertial force to the rotation first gear 461 side) in the driving state. After that, the rotary first gear 461 is meshed with the rotary second gear 462 (that is, a transmission state is formed) (see the state of transition from FIG. 29 (c) to FIG. 29 (b)). The rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be started in a state where the rotational drive of the drive motor 430 has momentum. As a result, even if the drive motor 430 is miniaturized, the moving members 491 and 492 can be started to move. In other words, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used after the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 is started.

In particular, in this cutoff state, the operating members 491 and 492 are opened and closed, but in the opening and closing operation, the only object that is moved (moved or displaced) by the driving force of the drive motor 430 is the operating members 491 and 492. As in the case of rotational operation, it is not necessary to move the entire mechanism including the mechanism portion and each arm body 471, 472 in addition to the operating members 491 and 492. Therefore, the load of the drive motor 430 is small, and it is possible to give sufficient momentum (inertial force to the rotation first gear 461 side) in the drive state.

The cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 are formed on both sides of the teeth 461c and 462c, and are cylindrical at the two positions of the ascending position U and the descending position D. It is possible to form a state in which the non-formed surface 462a is in contact with the surface 461a1 (blocking state). Therefore, not only when the movement of the operating members 491 and 492 in the descending position D to the ascending position U is started, but also when the moving of the operating members 491 and 492 in the ascending position U is started to the descending position D. In addition, it is possible to give momentum (inertial force) to the drive state of the drive motor 430.

From the state of the rotation angle θ1 shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b) and 29 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated to the rotation angle θ0 in the same phase. .. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), the slip (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 is utilized. Then, while stopping the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the ascending position U), the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise). The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be shortened to the distance L2 so that the closed operating members 491 and 492 can be opened. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the ascending position U, the opening and closing operation can be executed to open the closed operating members 491 and 492.

As described above, according to the composite operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) that are rotated (rotated) about the second axis 427, and their backs. An operating member 491, 492 (second moving member) arranged on the arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 and opened / closed (opening / closing operation) in a direction close to each other is provided, and the operating member 491, 492 (second moving member) is provided. ) Is stopped while the rotation operation of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is stopped (see FIGS. 28 and 30), while the operating members 491 and 492 (second moving member). While the opening / closing operation of is stopped, the combined operation of rotating the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) (see FIG. 29) can be executed by the drive motor 430 of 1.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the moving operation of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by the driving motor 1, the driving motor generates the driving force and the driving force is stopped. Since the structure is such that the operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member are switched by forming two driving states, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop. It was possible to form only the operation mode of moving the first moving member or the second moving member, and it was not possible to stop the other while moving the other. Therefore, in order to move one of the first moving member or the second moving member and stop the other, a drive motor for moving the first moving member and a drive motor for moving the second moving member are used. It was necessary to provide each individually, that is, to provide a total of two drive motors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, one of the moving members 491 and 492 (second moving member) or the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is operated while the other is operated. Since the operation mode of stopping can be achieved by the drive motor 430 of 1, the required number of drive motors 430 is reduced while enhancing the effect of moving and stopping the operating members 491 and 492, and the product cost is reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

Next, the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 45.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the retracted positions, and FIG. 32 is a front view of the first coupling operating unit 500 and the second coupling operating unit 600. It is a front view of the 1st coupling operation unit 500 and the 2nd coupling operation unit 600 in the state where the 1st engagement member 539 and the pair of 2nd coupling member 630 are arranged at the coupling position. The arrangement positions (opposite spacing) of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 are in a state where both units 500 and 600 are housed in the rear case 210. Corresponds to the arrangement position (opposite spacing).

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a first engaging member 539 formed so as to be able to move up and down via a slide mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 is linked. A pair of second coupling members 630 formed so as to be swingable to the left and right via a mechanism are provided, and a second coupling operating unit 600 is arranged below the first coupling operating unit 500 at predetermined intervals. A third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the back side (back side of the paper surface of FIGS. 31 and 32) of the space located between the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600. Will be set up.

The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 move the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 up and down and swing, respectively, to show the retracted position shown in FIG. 31 or the retracted position shown in FIG. 32. Place at the join position. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 31, the first engaging member 539 is raised, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated from each other to the left and right due to the tilt of the link mechanism, so that the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is separated. The front side is in an open state (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 32, the first engaging member 539 is lowered, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other by the standing of the link mechanism. The two coupling members 630 are arranged on the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81 and are coupled to each other (see FIG. 12).

In this case, according to the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the first engaging member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged side by side on the left and right, and the first engaging member 539 is lowered. When the lower surface 539e of the 1 engaging member 539 is in contact with the respective upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, a force in a direction in which they are brought close to each other is applied to the pair of second coupling members 630. As a result, not only the lower surface 539e of the first engaging member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be brought into close contact with each other, but also the facing surfaces of the pair of second coupling members 630 adjacent to each other on the left and right are brought into close contact with each other. Can be made to. As a result, each of these connecting members 539 and 630 can be bonded while suppressing the formation of a gap between them. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by connecting a plurality of members.

First, the first coupling operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 41.

33 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500, and FIG. 33 (b) is a bottom view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 33 (a). Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500. In FIG. 35, the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a substrate member 510, a drive unit 520 arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 and generating a driving force, and a drive unit 520 thereof. The driving force of the driving unit 520 is transmitted to the slide mechanism unit 530 arranged on the front side of the base member 510 and the slide mechanism unit 530, which is displaced (up and down) in the vertical direction in response to the driving force generated by. A first link member 541 arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 510 and a second link member arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 510 in a posture symmetrical with the first link member 541. A 542, a pair of raising members 550 arranged on the left and right sides of the slide mechanism portion 530 on the front side of the substrate member 510, a decorative portion 560 arranged on the front side of the pair of raising members 550, and a substrate. It mainly includes an urging spring 571 that is arranged on the front side of the member 510 and applies an urging force to the second link member 542.

The raising member 550 is formed in a box shape with the back side open, and the drive unit 520 arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 can be accommodated in the internal space of the raising member 550. As a result, as will be described later, even when the drive unit 520 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, the dead space formed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530 is effectively used. It can be utilized, and the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

The substrate member 510 is a member formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and is a rack portion arranged side by side along a pair of guide grooves 511 and one of the pair of guide grooves 511. 512, connecting grooves 513 and 514 formed on the left and right across the pair of guide grooves 511, shaft support holes 515 formed on the side of the connecting groove 513, and the front side and the back side of the substrate member 510, respectively. It mainly includes a support shaft 516 that is projected.

The guide groove 511 allows the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 to be inserted from the front side to the back side of the board member 510, and the insertion shaft 531c and the link members 541 and 542 can be connected to each other on the back side of the board member 510. It is a groove-shaped opening for the purpose, and a pair is extended linearly along the vertical direction while maintaining parallelism with each other at substantially the center of the substrate member 510 in the width direction. The width of the guide groove 511 is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530, and the insertion shaft 531c can be moved only along the extension direction of the guide groove 511. That is, the slide mechanism portion 530 can move (up and down) in the vertical direction along the extending direction of the guide groove 511 by guiding the insertion shaft 531c to the guide groove 511.

The rack portion 512 is a portion formed as a rack gear in which a plurality of teeth 512a are engraved on a plane along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, and is fixed to the front side of the substrate member 510. When the slide mechanism portion 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510, the pinion gear 537 (see FIG. 38) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is meshed with the teeth 512a of the rack portion 512. Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved (elevated) along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, the pinion gear 537 is rotationally driven along with the movement of the slide mechanism portion 530.

The connecting groove 513 has a groove shape for inserting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 from the front side to the back side of the board member 510 and connecting the connecting shaft 526 and the first link member 541 on the back side of the board member 510. It is an opening of the above, and is curved and extended in an arc shape that is convex toward the guide groove 511. Specifically, the connecting groove 513 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting out a part of the annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 515. The groove width of the connecting groove 513 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520, and the connecting shaft 526 can be moved only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

The shaft support hole 515 is an opening for inserting a support shaft 527 that pivotally supports the base end side of the first link member 541, and is arranged on the opposite side of the guide groove 511 with the connecting groove 513 interposed therebetween. As will be described later, the support shaft 527 is fixed to the case body 521 of the drive unit 520, and the drive unit 520 is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the tip of the support shaft 527 has a shaft support hole. It is projected to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 via 515. The first link member 541 is pivotally supported on the base end side by a support shaft 527 protruding through a shaft support hole 515, and is rotated about the support shaft 527.

The connecting groove 514 is formed by inserting the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 from the back surface side to the front side of the substrate member 510 and forming the end portion of the urging spring 542 in the locking claw 542b on the front side of the substrate member 510. It is a groove-shaped opening for making the opening groove, and is curved and extended in an arc shape that is convex toward the guide groove 511. That is, the connecting groove 514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows the locking claw 542b to move when the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516.

The support shaft 516 is a shaft body for axially supporting the second link member 542 and the urging spring 571, and as described above, the support shaft 516 is provided so as to project from the front side and the back side of the substrate member 510, respectively. The support shaft 516 is arranged at a position that is line-symmetrical with the shaft support hole 515, with a virtual straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a line of symmetry. The base end side (shaft support hole 542a) of the second link member 542 is pivotally supported by a support shaft 516 projecting from the back surface side of the substrate member 510, and the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516. Further, the urging spring 571 is held by a support shaft 516 projecting from the front side of the substrate member 510.

The urging spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, the coil portion thereof is held (guided) by the support shaft 516, and one arm portion of the pair of arm portions engages with the second link member 542. It is locked to the stop claw 542b, and the other arm portion is locked to the locking claw 517 of the substrate member 510. The urging spring 571 is arranged in a state where the pair of arms are elastically deformed in a direction close to each other, and the elastic recovery force pushes up the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 upward (FIG. FIG. 34 and the upper side of FIG. 35). That is, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is applied in the direction of holding the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG. 35 (the posture in which the tip end side is positioned on the upper end side of the guide groove 511).

The drive unit 520 is a unit for generating a driving force for sliding displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 in the vertical direction, and is on the front side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530. Displaced. Here, the drive unit 520 will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

FIG. 36 is a rear view of the drive unit 520. In FIG. 36, the positions of the connecting groove 513 and the shaft support hole 515 of the substrate member 510 in a state where the drive unit 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510 are schematically illustrated by using a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 36, the drive unit 520 is arranged on the front side of the case body 521 and the case body 521, and the drive shaft 522 projects the drive shaft toward the back surface side of the case body 521 (FIGS. 34 and FIG. 35), the pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and the pinion gear 523 meshed with the pinion gear 523 and rotatably supported by the rotating shaft 524a projecting from the back surface of the case body 521. A crank gear 524, a connecting rod 525 whose one end is rotatably supported by the crank gear 524 via a rotating shaft 525a, a connecting rod 526 projecting from the other end of the connecting rod 525, and a case body 521. Mainly includes a support shaft 527 projecting from the back surface of the. The drive shaft, the rotary shafts 524a, 525a, the connecting shaft 526, and the support shaft 527 of the drive motor 522 are arranged in parallel, respectively.

The rotating shaft 525a that rotatably supports one end of the connecting rod 525 to the crank gear 524 is arranged at a position eccentric with respect to the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524, and is connected so as to project from the other end of the connecting rod 525. As described above, the shaft 526 is inserted into the connecting groove 513 of the substrate member 510 and is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. Therefore, the crank gear 524, the rotating shaft 525a, and the connecting rod 525 constitute a crank mechanism that converts the rotational motion of the crank gear 524 into the reciprocating motion of the connecting shaft 526 via the connecting rod 525.

That is, when the pinion gear 523 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 and the crank gear 524 is rotated in one direction (for example, the arrow A1 direction) by the rotation, the connecting shaft 526 is along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. While being displaced in one direction (arrow B1 direction), when the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the crank gear 524 is rotated in the other direction (arrow A2 direction), the moving direction of the connecting shaft 526 is reversed. Then, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the other direction (direction of arrow B2) along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

When the drive unit 520 (case body 521) is assembled to the front side of the substrate member 510, as described above, the connecting shaft 526 and the support shaft 527 are provided in the connecting groove 513 and the support hole 515 of the substrate member 510, respectively. It is inserted so that the tip of the connecting shaft 526 and the tip of the support shaft 527 project to the back surface side of the substrate member 510, respectively (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

In this case, the connecting shaft 526 is rotatably connected to the longitudinal intermediate portion (connecting hole 541b) of the first link member 541, and the support shaft 527 is rotatably connected to the proximal end portion (shaft support hole 541a) of the first link member 541. (See FIG. 35), the connection shaft 526 is displaced along the connection groove 513 (in the direction of arrow B1 or in the direction of arrow B2) by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522, whereby the first link member 541 is supported by the support shaft. It can be rotated around 527.

It will be described back from FIG. 33 to FIG. 35. The first link member 541 is a member for connecting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism unit 530. It is formed in the shape of a plate. The first link member 541 is formed with a shaft support hole 541a at the proximal end portion, a connecting hole 541b at the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction, and a sliding hole 541c at the distal end portion opposite to the proximal end portion.

The shaft support hole 541a and the connecting hole 541b are formed as through holes having a circular shape in front view, and the shaft support shaft 527 and the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 are rotatably inserted therein. On the other hand, the sliding hole 541c is formed as a through hole having a long hole shape in front view along the major axis direction in the longitudinal direction of the first link member 541, and can slide along the long hole shape (major axis direction). The insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is inserted.

Therefore, when the first link member 541 is rotated in the direction of raising the sliding hole 541c around the support hole 541a (direction of arrow B1, see FIG. 36), the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 becomes the substrate member 510. The slide mechanism portion 530 is displaced upward along the guide groove 511, while the first link member 541 lowers the sliding hole 541c about the support hole 541a (arrow B2 direction, see FIG. 36). When rotated to, the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is displaced downward along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

Here, in the present embodiment, the connecting rod 525 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, and the first link member 541 is arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 510, and the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are arranged. Since they are connected (connected) to each other via the connecting groove 513 of the board member 510, they are connected to the driving force transmission path (that is, the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524) formed by these connecting rods 525 and the first link member 541. Length dimension of the part connecting the shaft 526 (connecting rod 525) and the part connecting the connecting shaft 526 and the insertion shaft 531c (the part from the connecting hole 541b to the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541). ) Becomes longer. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 may be deformed, and the driving force may not be stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base end side (shaft support hole 541a) is rotatably supported by the support shaft 527 on the back surface of the substrate member 510 on the first link member 541. Utilizing the rigidity of the case body 521 of the drive unit 520 to which the shaft 527 is fixed and the substrate member 510 to which the case body 521 is fastened and fixed, the rigidity of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 as a whole is increased. Can be done. As a result, when the driving force of the driving motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are suppressed from being deformed, and the driving force is stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c). can do.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first link member 541 (shaft support hole 541a) of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 is rotatably supported by the substrate member 510, the connecting rod 525 is rotatably supported by the substrate member 510. Compared with the case where the shaft is rotatably supported, the transmission path of the driving force from the portion pivotally supported by the substrate member 510 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be shortened, and as a result, the driving force can be shortened. The transmission to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be further stabilized.

The second link member 542 is a member for connecting the urging spring 571 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 and transmitting the urging force of the urging spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530, and is a long plate. It is formed in a shape. Similar to the first link member 541, the second link member 542 is formed with a shaft support hole 542a and a sliding hole 542c at the base end portion and the tip end portion, respectively. The support shaft 516 of the substrate member 510 is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 542a, and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is inserted into the sliding hole 542c. Further, a locking claw 542b is formed in the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the second link member 542. As described above, the locking claw 542b is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 via the connecting groove 514, and locks the arm portion of the urging spring 571.

Therefore, since the second link member 542 holds the slide mechanism portion 530 symmetrically with the first link member 541, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed. Further, the urging force of the urging spring 571 acts on the slide mechanism portion 530 in the ascending direction (the direction in which the tip end side (sliding hole 542c) of the second link member 542 is raised) via the second link member 542. Therefore, when raising the slide mechanism unit 530, the driving force of the driving unit 520 can be assisted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the drive motor 522.

A retaining ring E formed as an E-ring is attached to the support shafts 527 and 516 inserted into the shaft support holes 541a and 542a of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. , The insertion shaft 531c inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 has a seating surface having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding holes 541c and 542c as a retaining ring. A fastening screw with a head or washer) is fastened (see FIG. 35).

Here, with respect to the first link member 541, the attachment of the retaining ring E as a retaining ring or the fastening of the fastening screw to the connecting shaft 526 inserted into the connecting hole 541b of the first link member 541 is omitted. That is, by applying retaining to two of the three shafts (support shaft 527 and insertion shaft 531c), the retaining of the remaining one (connecting shaft 526) can be omitted. The number of parts required to prevent disconnection can be reduced. In particular, the two shafts of the long first link member 541 on the proximal end side and the distal end side are prevented from coming off, and the shaft at a position intermediate between the proximal end side and the distal end side is prevented from coming off. By adopting a structure in which the above is omitted, the first link member 451 can be stably rotated while suppressing the shaft (connecting shaft 526) from which the retaining is omitted from coming off from the connecting hole 541b.

As described above, the slide mechanism portion 530 is a mechanism portion that slides (elevates) in the vertical direction along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and lowers the first engaging member 539 to a predetermined position. Then, it is coupled to the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 (see FIG. 32). Here, the slide mechanism unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39.

37 (a) is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism portion 530, and FIG. 37 (b) is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism portion 530. Further, FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 with the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 with the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 viewed from the rear. be.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the slide mechanism portion 530 includes an A layer base plate 531, a B layer base plate 532 and a B layer decorative body 533, a C layer base plate 534 and a C layer decorative body 535, and the like. The first pinion gear 537, the second pinion gear 538, and the first coupling member 539 are provided, and the first coupling member 539 is slid up and down by the driving force transmitted from the drive unit 520 via the first link member 541 (slide displacement (1). Move up and down).

According to the slide mechanism portion 530 of the present embodiment, two sets of double rack and pinion structures are interposed between the A layer base plate 531 and the first coupling member 539, and the first link member 541 to the A layer base. The driving force received by the plate 531 is transmitted to the first coupling member 539 via two sets of double rack and pinion structures, thereby accelerating the slide displacement (elevation) of the first coupling member 539. Is configured to be able to.

The A-layer base plate 531 has a main body portion 531a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape in front view, and a guide groove 531b which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 531a. , Multiple insertion shafts 531c (six in total in this embodiment) that are projected from the back surface of the main body 531a and juxtaposed to the left and right across the guide groove 531b, and project to the front side of the main body 531a. It is provided with a support shaft 531d that rotatably supports the first pinion gear 537.

In the A-layer base plate 531, a plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, respectively, and the collar C having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide groove 511 at the tip of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. Is fastened and fixed to the substrate member 510 so that it can be slidably displaced (elevated) (see FIG. 35). In this case, the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the support shaft 531d is meshed with the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510.

In this embodiment, two of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 as described above. At the top, fasten the fastening screw to the tip as a retaining screw.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are located on the upper side (upper side of FIG. 39) of the center in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction of FIG. 39) of the A layer base plate 531. Therefore, as will be described later, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is in a forward leaning posture toward the front on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is set to the collar C, the first link member 541, and the first. It can be effectively regulated by the two-link member 542, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid and displaced (elevated) in a stable state.

The B-layer base plate 532 includes a main body portion 532a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of insertion holes 532b formed through the main body portion 532a, and a plurality of protrusions from the back surface of the main body portion 532a. The insertion shaft 532c is provided with a rack portion 532d having a plurality of teeth engraved as rack gears on the side surface of the main body portion 532a along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 532a.

The B-layer base plate 532 is formed by inserting a plurality of insertion shafts 532c into the guide grooves 531b of the A-layer base plate 531 and fastening them to the tips of the inserted insertion shafts 532c as a retaining screw. It is held on the A-layer base plate 531 so that it can be slidably displaced (elevated).

In this case, the rack portion 532d arranged on the side surface of the B layer base plate 532 (main body portion 532a) is meshed with the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the A layer base plate 531 (support shaft 531d). That is, the first pinion gear 537 is meshed with both the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510 and the rack portion 532d of the B layer base plate 532, whereby the first set of double rack pinion structure is formed. Therefore, when the A-layer base plate 531 is slidably displaced (elevated) with respect to the substrate member 510, the B-layer base plate 532 with respect to the A-layer base plate 531 via the first set of double rack and pinion structures. Slide displacement (elevation). That is, the B-layer base plate 532 is slidably displaced (elevated) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the A-layer base plate 531.

The B-layer decorative body 533 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, is fixed to the B-layer base plate 532, and is slidably displaced (elevated) together with the B-layer base plate 532. Will be done. Specifically, the B-layer decorative body 533 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 533a projecting from the back surface thereof, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 532b of the B-layer base plate 532 are fastened to the insertion shafts 533a. As a result, it is fixed to the front surface side of the B layer base plate 532.

The plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B-layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide groove 339b of the first coupling member 539 and the guide groove 534b of the C-layer base plate 534, and then fixed to the B-layer base plate 532. .. In this case, the insertion shaft 532a of one of the plurality of insertion shafts 532a of the B-layer decorative body 533 pivotally supports the second pinion gear 538. Therefore, when the B-layer decorative body 533 and the B-layer base plate 532 are slide-displaced (elevated) with respect to the A-layer base plate 531, the second pinion gear 538 is also slid-displaced (elevated / lowered) with respect to the A-layer base plate 531. ).

The C-layer base plate 534 includes a main body portion 534a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 534b which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 534a. A plurality of insertion holes 534c formed through the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 534d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as rack gears along the guide groove 534b on the front surface side of the main body portion 532a are provided.

The C-layer decorative body 535 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, is fixed to the C-layer base plate 534, and is slidably displaced (elevated) together with the C-layer base plate 534. Will be done. Specifically, the C-layer decorative body 535 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 535a projecting from the back surface thereof, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 534c of the C-layer base plate 534 are fastened to the insertion shafts 535a. As a result, it is fixed to the front surface side of the C layer base plate 534.

The first coupling member 539 is a member for forming a decorative portion visible to the player from the front side and abutting against the pair of second coupling members 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 to form a coupled state. Yes (see FIG. 32), a main body portion 539a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape in front view, and a guide groove 539b which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 539a. , A decorative portion 539c connected below the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 539d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as rack gears along the guide groove 539b on the back surface side of the main body portion 532a.

The lower surface 539e of the first connecting member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is formed by combining two flat surfaces that incline downward toward the center. That is, the front view shape of the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is formed into an inverted V shape whose center protrudes in the downward direction (lower direction in FIG. 38) (see FIGS. 40 and 41). ). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is in contact with the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32).

Further, a concave portion 539e1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view is recessed in the center of the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539. In the concave portion 539e1, the convex portion 630a1 projecting from the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 is housed (concave and convex fitting) at the coupling position. By this uneven fitting, the relative displacement (front-back direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be regulated at the coupling position.

In the C-layer base plate 534 and the first connecting member 539, a plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B-layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide grooves 534b and 539b of the C-layer base plate 534 and the first connecting member 539, respectively. It is held so that it can be slidably displaced (elevated) between the B-layer decorative body 533 and the B-layer base plate 532, respectively.

In this case, the second pinion gear 538 pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 533a of the B-layer decorative body 533 is the rack portion 534d arranged on the front side of the C-layer base plate 534 (main body portion 534a), and the first coupling member. It is meshed with both the rack portion 539d arranged on the back surface side of the 539 (main body portion 539a), thereby forming a second set of double rack and pinion structures. Therefore, when the B-layer base plate 532 (and the B-layer decorative body 533) is slidably displaced (elevated) with respect to the A-layer base plate 531, the first coupling member is moved through the second set of double rack and pinion mechanisms. The 539 is slid to the B-layer base plate 532 (and the B-layer decorative body 533). That is, the first coupling member 539 is slid displacement (elevated) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the B layer base plate 532.

It will be described back from FIG. 33 to FIG. 35. As described above, the first coupling member 500 is provided with a slide mechanism portion 530 on the front side of the substrate member 510, and a plurality of the first coupling members 500 projecting from the back surface of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) (this embodiment). In the embodiment, 6) insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, respectively, and a collar C is applied to the insertion shafts 531c of a part (4) of the plurality of inserted insertion shafts 531c. The remaining (two) insertion shafts 531c are connected to the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 (see FIG. 35).

Here, also in the conventional gaming machine, a plurality of insertion shafts (corresponding to the insertion shaft 531c) are provided on the moving member (corresponding to the slide mechanism portion 530), and the plurality of insertion shafts are used as the substrate member (corresponding to the substrate member 510). ) Is inserted into the guide groove (corresponding to the guide groove 511), and the moving member is slidably displaced along the guide groove by the driving force of the driving means (corresponding to the driving unit 520).

In this case, in order to stably perform the slide displacement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of insertion shafts to be inserted into the guide groove. On the other hand, if the number of insertion shafts is increased, the number of parts (corresponding to the collar C) for holding the insertion shafts (preventing them from coming off from the guide groove) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing costs while making it possible to stabilize the slide displacement of the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) is provided on the front side where the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged. The first link member 541 is arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 510 which is on the opposite side of the substrate member 510, and the first link member 541 is attached to the insertion shaft 531c of one of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510. Since they are connected, the collar C of one of the plurality of collars C for preventing the plurality of insertion shafts 531c from coming off from the guide groove 511 can be shared with the first link member 541. As a result, the number of the insertion shafts 531c is secured, and the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized, and the parts (color C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c are supported. It is possible to reduce the points and reduce the cost.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second link member 542 is provided with the guide groove 511 with respect to the first link member 541 on the back surface side of the substrate member 510 on the side opposite to the front side on which the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged. The second link member 542 is sandwiched and symmetrically arranged, and the second link member 542 is connected to the insertion shaft 531c of one of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, so that the first link member is connected. Not only can the effect of making the support reaction force received by the slide mechanism portion 530 from the 541 and the second link member 542 symmetrical (stabilization of the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530) can be achieved, but also among a plurality of colors C. Since the color C of 1 can also be used by the second link member 542, the number of insertion shafts 531c can be secured and the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized. However, it is possible to further reduce the cost by reducing the number of parts (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 510 to stabilize the slide displacement and reduce the cost. Further, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 520 is configured with a crank mechanism (crank gear 524, connecting rod 525 and connecting shaft 526), and the connecting groove 513 is formed in the substrate member 510 by opening the connecting groove 513. By connecting the connecting shaft 526 to the first link member 541, the drive unit 520 can be arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510. As a result, the components of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be concentrated on the front side of the board member 510, so that the limited space can be effectively utilized and the components can be efficiently arranged. As a result, the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced.

In particular, in the first coupling operation unit 500, since the decorative portion 560 is arranged on the front surface side of the slide mechanism portion 530, the slide mechanism portion 530 and the decorative portion 560 are in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). The dimensions in the front-rear direction increase accordingly. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the drive unit 520 can be arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, so that the drive unit 520 is on the front surface side of the substrate member 510. It can be arranged in the dead space formed on the side of the slide mechanism portion 530. That is, two relatively large elements of the slide mechanism portion 530 and the drive portion 520 can be arranged side by side in the left-right direction. As a result, the dead space in the limited space can be effectively utilized, and the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

Further, in this case, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the first link member 541 is centered on the support shaft 527 on the back surface side of the substrate member 510. Since the structure is rotated, the space for the movement of the first link member 541 can be made flat. That is, a space for moving the first link member 541 can be secured by a flat space on the back side of the substrate member 510, and it is necessary to secure a large space in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). There is no. Therefore, from this point as well, the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced particularly in the front-rear direction.

The same applies to the second link member 542. By using the connecting groove 514, the urging spring 571 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, and the above-mentioned dead space is effectively utilized. The space for the movement of the second link member 542 can also be made flat, and as a result, the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). can.

Next, the operation of the first coupling operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In this description, FIGS. 34 to 39 will be referred to as appropriate.

40 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged in the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st coupling operation unit 500 in the said state. FIG. 41A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 41B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st coupling operation unit 500 in the said state. In addition, in FIGS. 40 and 41, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), in the state where the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, the crank gear 524 is rotated in the arrow A1 direction in the drive unit 520 via the connecting rod 525. The connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of arrow B1 (see FIG. 36), and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 raise the sliding holes 541c and 542c around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a. It is arranged in a posture rotated in the direction (upper in FIG. 40 (b)). Therefore, the A layer base plate 531 (FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged on the upper end side (upper side of FIG. 40 (b)) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the first coupling member 539 is raised. A state (with the retracted position placed) is formed.

In this case, as described above, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is applied to the second link member 542. The urging force of the urging spring 571 is such that the posture of the second link member 542 is rotated in the posture shown in FIG. 40 (b) (that is, the posture in which the sliding hole 542c is raised around the shaft support hole 542a). ) Is acted on in the direction of holding. Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. 40 (a). In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be in the stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is moved in the vertical direction. Even when vibration is generated, the urging force of the urging spring 571 can be used to quickly converge the vibration in the vertical direction of the first coupling member 539.

From the state shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), when the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of arrow B2 via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of arrow A2 in the drive unit 520. (See FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are rotated around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a in the direction of lowering the sliding holes 541c and 542c (downward in FIG. 40B). .. As a result, the A-layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIG. 38 and FIG. (See FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move the sliding holes 541c and 542c down with the shaft support holes 541a and 542a as the center. Further rotated, the A layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 539c) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged on the lower end side (lower side of FIG. 41B) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, so that the first coupling member A state in which the 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged) is formed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), in the drive unit 520, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of the arrow B1 via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of the arrow A1. As a result (see FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move up the sliding holes 541c and 542c around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a (upward in FIG. 41 (b)). It is rotated. As a result, the A-layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIG. 38 and FIG. (See FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the first connecting member 539 is arranged (returned) to the retracted position.

According to the present embodiment, the slide mechanism portion 530 has a structure in which the first coupling member 539 is slid and displaced in the vertical direction via two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms. It can be speeded up. On the other hand, when raising the first coupling member 539 from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the retracted position in FIG. 40 (a), not only the first coupling member 539 but also the slide mechanism portion 530 and others are used. Since each of the constituent members of the above must also be raised against the action of gravity, the load on the drive motor 522 (see FIGS. 34 and 35) becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the urging force of the urging spring 571 makes the posture of the second link member 542 centered on the posture shown in FIG. 40 (b) (that is, the shaft support hole 542a as the center). It acts in the direction of holding the sliding hole 542c in the posture rotated in the upward direction). Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the retracted position in FIG. 40 (a) against the action of gravity, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is assisted. Since it can be used as a force, the driving force required for the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 520 can be reduced accordingly, and the capacity thereof can be reduced.

Here, the substrate member 510 is arranged in a posture in which the extension direction of the guide groove 511 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (vertical direction of FIGS. 40 and 41). Specifically, the lower end side of the guide groove 511 is projected toward the front side (front side, front side of the paper surface in FIG. 40 (a)) of the board member 510 (the upper end side of the guide groove 511 is the back side of the board member 510 (the front side). It is arranged in a posture (retracted to the rear side, the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 40 (a)). As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 is tilted forward due to its own weight (a posture in which the slide mechanism portion 530 is tilted in a direction away from the front surface of the base member 510 (front side)). Since it is possible to suppress this, the load on the color C can be reduced accordingly and the durability thereof can be improved.

However, since the slide mechanism portion 530 is configured by superimposing each element thereof (for example, A layer base plate 531 and B layer base plate 532, C layer base plate 534, etc.), the slide mechanism portion 510 is configured with respect to the above-mentioned vertical direction of the substrate member 510. If the inclination is made too large, the elements of the slide mechanism portion 530 are likely to be brought into close contact with each other, and the sliding resistance at the time of the slide displacement becomes large. Therefore, the above-mentioned inclination cannot be made sufficiently large, and therefore, a relatively large load is applied to the color C.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the substrate member 510 is interposed between the slide mechanism portion 530 and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 connected (connected) to the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530. Therefore, the forward leaning posture of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be regulated not only by the collar C but also by the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. As a result, the load on the collar C can be suppressed to improve its durability, and the slide mechanism portion 530 can be slid and displaced (elevated) in a stable state.

In particular, as described above, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are located above the center in the longitudinal direction of the layer A base plate 531 (see FIG. 39). Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is in a forward leaning posture toward the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is adjusted by the collar C, the first link member 541, and the second link member 542. It can be effectively regulated, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid and displaced (elevated) in a stable state.

Next, the second coupling operation unit 600 disposed below the first coupling operation unit 500 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45.

FIG. 42 is a front perspective view of the second coupling operation unit 600. 43 (a) is a front view of the second coupling operation unit 600, and FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the second coupling operation unit 600. In FIG. 43A, the illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. Further, FIGS. 42 and 43 show a state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the second coupling operation unit 600 is pivotally supported by the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, and the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 on the proximal end side, respectively. Link means (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622), a second coupling member 630 rotatably supported on the tip side of each of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622, and an inner link member 621. And a drive motor 640 that generates a driving force for displaced the outer link member 622, and a transmission means (pinion gear 651 and a transmission gear) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 640 to the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. 652) and is mainly provided.

In this embodiment, a total pair of links, a second coupling member 630, a drive motor 640, and a transmission means is arranged on the left and right sides of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, respectively. .. In this case, the set arranged on the left side of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 and the set arranged on the right side are the width directions of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 (left and right in FIG. 43A). Direction) Since the configurations are substantially the same except that they are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the virtual line passing through the center and the shapes of the decorative portions are different, the same reference numerals will be given for explanation.

The back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are members formed in a plate shape from a resin material, respectively, and are fastened and fixed facing each other at a predetermined interval, and link means (internal space) between the facing surfaces thereof (internal space). The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) and the transmission means (pinion gear 651 and transmission gear 652) are accommodated.

A pair of guide grooves 611a formed by being curved in an arc shape are formed in the back case body 611 as an opening. The guide groove 611a is curved in an arc shape centered on the proximal shaft 621a described later (that is, formed in a shape obtained by cutting out a part of the annular shape centered on the proximal shaft 621a), and the inner link member 621. A rotatably shaft-supported collar 621d is fitted on the back surface of the rotatably. The groove width of the guide groove 611a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the collar 621d. Therefore, as will be described later, when the inner link member 621 is rotated about the proximal shaft 621a, the collar 621d is guided along the extending direction of the guide groove 611a, so that the inner link member 621 ( And the rotation of the outer link member 622) can be stabilized. As a result, the position accuracy of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position can be improved.

The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotatably supported on the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 via the proximal ends shafts 621a and 622a, while the distal end side thereof is rotatably supported by the distal end shaft 621b, It is rotatably pivotally supported by the second coupling member 630 via 622b.

In this case, in the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622, the distance between the proximal shaft 621a and the proximal shaft 622a and the distance between the distal shaft 621b and the distal shaft 622b are equalized, and the proximal shaft 621a is equalized. And the distance between the tip shaft 621b and the distance between the proximal shaft 622a and the tip shaft 622b are equalized to form a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, when the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotated about the proximal shafts 621a and 622a, the second coupling member 630 does not have a rotation center and is parallel to each other (that is, shown in FIG. 43A). Moved (while maintaining the posture to do).

The second coupling member 630 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side and is coupled to the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32), and is a lower surface of the first coupling member 539. An upper surface 630a to which the 539e is abutted and an facing surface 630b to which the other second coupling member 630 is abutted to each other when they are adjacent to each other are formed.

The upper surface 630a is formed as a flat surface that inclines downward toward the facing surface 630b in the front view of the second coupling member 630 shown in FIG. 43, and the facing surface 630b is formed as a flat surface parallel to the vertical direction. Will be done. Therefore, when the pair of second coupling members 630 are in contact with each other at the coupling position, the front view shape of the pair of second coupling members 630 on the upper surface 630a side is V-shaped with the center recessed. It is formed into a shape (see FIG. 44 (b)). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is abutted against each of the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 (see FIG. 32).

Further, on the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, a convex portion 630a1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view is projected on the facing surface 630b side, respectively. The convex portion 630a1 is housed (concave and convex fitted) in the concave portion 539e1 recessed in the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. By this uneven fitting, as described above, the relative displacement (front-back direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be regulated at the coupling position. Here, the convex portion 630a1 is reduced in thickness toward the tip of the protrusion. Therefore, when the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 is coupled (contacted) to the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539, it is possible to easily insert (internally fit) the convex portion 630a1 into the concave portion 539e1. can.

A gear portion 621c is integrally formed on the base end side of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is a portion formed in a fan shape that projects outward in the radial direction about the base end shaft 621a, and a plurality of teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the fan shape. A transmission gear 652, which will be described later, is meshed with the gear portion 621c.

The drive motor 640 is arranged on the back side of the back case body 611, and the pinion gear 651 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 640 projecting to the front side of the back case body 611. A transmission gear 652 is meshed with the pinion gear 651, and a gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621 is meshed with the transmission gear 652 as described above.

Next, the operation of the second coupling operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In this description, FIG. 43 (a) will be referred to as appropriate.

44 (a) and 44 (b) are front views of the second coupling operation unit 600, and the illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. In FIG. 44 (a), the pair of second coupling members 630 is arranged between the retracted position and the coupling position, and in FIG. 44 (b), the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. The states are shown in the figure.

At the retracted position shown in FIG. 43A, the left and right link mechanisms (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622) are tilted in directions so as to be separated from each other, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated from each other to the left and right. When the left and right drive motors 640 are rotationally driven from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 43A and the pinion gear 651 is rotated, the rotation is caused by the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621 via the transmission gear 652. The gear portion 621c is rotated around the base end shaft 621a. As a result, the left and right inner link members 621 are rotated about the proximal shaft 621a, respectively, and as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the left and right link mechanisms (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622) are close to each other. Stand up in the direction.

When the left and right drive motors 640 are further rotationally driven from the state shown in FIG. 44 (a), the left and right link mechanisms (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622) are close to each other as shown in FIG. 44 (b). A pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position so as to be further erected in the direction of That is, the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the facing surfaces 630b are brought into contact with each other. On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the drive motor 640 is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the above-mentioned case, the left and right link mechanisms (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622) are separated from each other. As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

Returning to FIGS. 31 and 32, the coupling operation of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 45 will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 45 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling positions.

As described above, the coupling of the first coupling member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 is a pair of second couplings from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. The coupling members 630 are arranged side by side on the left and right so as to be close to each other by standing upright of the link mechanism, and the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged next to each other on the left and right sides. As shown in 32, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surface 630a of each of the pair of second coupling members 630.

Here, as shown in FIG. 45, in the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the inclination angle of the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 with respect to the horizontal plane is an angle θ. It is said that. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is lowered (sliding displacement) along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 45), it acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 from the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539. The vertical force F is divided into a force component Fv (= F × cos θ) in the direction perpendicular to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a and a force component Fp (= F × sin θ) in the direction parallel to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a. Can be disassembled. Here, the force F is approximated as a concentrated load acting on the center in the width direction on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the angle θ of the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a with respect to the horizontal plane is set to be smaller than the angle α with respect to the vertical direction of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. Further, in the present embodiment, when the action direction of the force component Fv is extended from the center of the upper surface 630a in the width direction, the extension line thereof is inside the proximal axis 622a of the outer link member 622 (inner link member 621). It is formed so as to pass through the base end axis 621a side).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged side by side on the left and right, and the direction substantially orthogonal to the adjacent direction of the pair of second coupling members 630 (vertical). The first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the second coupling member 630 from the direction (vertical direction in FIG. 45), and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. Then, it is possible to form a force in the direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other in the adjacent directions. As a result, not only the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 can be coupled, but also the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled to each other, and a plurality of members ( The effect of connecting the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630) can be ensured.

That is, even in a conventional gaming machine, a pair of members are provided so as to be movable, the pair of members are retracted to different retracted positions, and the pair is moved from the different retracted positions and arranged at the coupling position. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-115300). In this case, if the coupling is not properly performed, such as when a gap is formed between the pair of members at the coupling position, the effect of connecting the pair of members is impaired. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the pair of members have a symmetrical shape, it is relatively easy to connect the pair of members facing each other, but three or more members are properly (3 or more). That is, it was difficult to combine them (while suppressing the generation of gaps).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is in contact with each of the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, a pair. Since it is possible to form a force in the direction in which the second coupling member 630 is brought close to each other in the adjacent direction, a gap is generated between the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. Not only can this be suppressed, but the respective members can be coupled to each other while suppressing the formation of a gap between the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630. That is, three or more members can be properly coupled to each other, and the effect of the coupling can be ensured.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 45, the pair of second coupling members 630 has a front view shape (in FIGS. 32 and 45) on the upper surface 630a side (upper side of FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape shown in the figure) has a concave shape in which the center is recessed downward (lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45), while the first connecting member 539 has a front view on the lower surface 539e side (lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape (the shape shown in FIGS. 32 and 45) corresponds to the shape of the pair of second coupling members 630 and has a protruding shape whose center protrudes downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45).

Therefore, as described above, at the reference position, the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630, and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. Upon contact with each, the first coupling member 539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 630 due to the concave and protruding shapes, and the first coupling member 539 is paired with the second coupling member 630. Reminds the player of a mode in which the two are spread in a direction away from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the facing surfaces 630b).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is in contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, whereby the pair of second coupling members is brought into contact with each other. By forming a force in a direction in which the 630s are brought close to each other, the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled while suppressing the formation of a gap between the facing surfaces 630b. As a result, it can be operated in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, the annular operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57.

FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the annulus operating unit 700 in a state where the annulus forming member 790 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 47 is an annulus in a state where the annulus forming member 790 is arranged in the connecting position. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the ring operating unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790 that are moved up and down and rotated via the link member 770, and as described above, the opening 211a (third symbol display). It is disposed on the rear case 210 at a position below the device 81 (see FIG. 2) and on the rear side of the rotary operation unit 300 (see FIGS. 6 to 9). The annulus operation unit 700 is moved up and down while rotating the pair of annulus forming members 790, and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIG. 46 or the coupling position shown in FIG. 47.

At the retracted position shown in FIG. 46, the pair of annulus forming members 790 are lowered while being separated from each other to the left and right, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is opened (FIG. 6). reference). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 47, the pair of annulus forming members 790 are rotated upward in a direction close to each other, and the pair of annulus forming members 790 are coupled to each other to form a third symbol display device. An annulus shape is formed on the front surface side of the 81 (see FIG. 10).

In this case, according to the annulus operation unit 700, when the pair of annulus forming members 790 are raised upward and placed at the coupling position, the annulus forming member 790 is mechanically moved to the coupling position (raised position). As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the pair of annulus forming members 790 at the coupling position can be suppressed.

FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the annulus operating unit 700 with the disassembled annulus operating unit 700 viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded view of the annulus operating unit 700 with the disassembled annulus operating unit 700 viewed from the rear. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the annular operation unit 700 includes an intermediate case body 710, a back case body 720 disposed on the back side of the intermediate case body 710, and a side opposite to the back case 720. The front case body 730 arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, the drive motor 740 arranged in the intermediate case 710 and generating the rotational driving force, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 are transmitted. (1st gear 751 to 6th gear 756), a rack pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762) that converts rotational motion transmitted through the gear group into linear motion, and the like. A pair of link members 770 whose base ends are rotatably supported by a pair of racks 762 in a rack pinion mechanism, an elevating base body 780 whose tips of the pair of link members 770 are axially supported, and an elevating base thereof. The body 780 is mainly provided with a pair of ring-forming members 790 whose base ends are rotatably supported.

The intermediate case body 710 holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism rotatably and slidably with respect to the rear case body 720 disposed on the rear side, and the front case body disposed on the front side. It is a member that holds the base end of the link member 770 between the 730 and the link member so that it can be slidably displaced. And an overhanging portion 713 that projects upward from the upper edge of the main body portion 711.

The insertion groove 712 is inserted through the insertion shaft 772 of the pair of link members 770 arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711), and the insertion shaft 772 of the pair of link members 770 inserted therein is inserted. It is a groove-shaped opening for inserting into the insertion holes 762c of the pair of racks 762 on the back surface side of the main body portion 711, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 711. The width of the insertion groove 712 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

The overhanging portion 713 is a portion that abuts on the back surface of the link member 770 and suppresses the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 56), and is the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 711. It is formed in a substantially triangular shape with a front view extending upward (widening) from the tip of the overhang toward the upper edge of the main body 711, and the front surface 713a is the front surface 711a of the main body 711. It is formed so as to be flush with each other (smoothly connected and parallel to each other without any step).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) toward the upright state, the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 comes into contact with the back surface of the link member 770 (FIGS. 47 and 56). (See), and when the link member 770 is in the upright position, the link member 770 can be sandwiched between the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 and the pillar portion 732 of the case body 730 (see FIG. 47). .. As a result, the link member 770 can be brought into contact with the link member 770 in the standing state in which the posture of the link member 770 tends to be particularly unstable or in the vicinity thereof, so that the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

The edge of the overhanging portion 713 is formed by being curved in an arc shape in a front view. Therefore, as the link member 770 stands up (that is, as its posture tends to become unstable), the area of the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 that can come into contact with the back surface of the link member 770 can be expanded. While the link member 770 can be effectively suppressed from swinging in the front-rear direction, the area of the overhanging portion 713 that can be visually recognized from the front can be made smaller to prevent the appearance from being impaired.

Further, in the overhanging portion 713, a head 713b formed at the tip in the overhanging direction (upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49) is projected to the front (front), and the head 713b is a front case body 730 described later. It is connected to the top of the pillar portion 732. Therefore, as will be described later, when the pair of link members 770 are erected upright, the head 713b of the overhanging portion 713 is interposed between the pair of link members 770 facing each other.

The rear case body 720 is a member that rotatably and slidably holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism between the rear case body 720 and the intermediate case body 710. An insertion groove 722 formed in the main body 721, a front end guide groove 723 and a rear end guide groove 724 arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722, and a gear group (second gear 752 to sixth gear 756). And a plurality of shafts 725 that rotatably support the pinion gear 761 and the pinion gear 761 respectively.

The insertion groove 722 has an insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 protruding from the back surface of the rack 762 (that is, an insertion shaft 772 inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710). It is a groove-shaped opening for receiving, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 721. That is, the insertion groove 722 is formed at a position where it overlaps with the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710 in the front view in the assembled state. The width of the insertion groove 722 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

The tip guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 are groove-shaped openings for inserting the tip guide piece 762a and the rear end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762 and restricting the moving direction thereof, and are the same as the insertion groove 722. It is installed in parallel with the insertion groove 722 with a predetermined interval between them. The groove width of the tip guide groove 723 is set to be smaller than the groove width of the rear end guide groove 724, and the rear end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762 is formed in the tip guide groove 723 so as not to be inserted. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress an assembly defect when assembling the rack 762 to the rear case body 720, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembling work.

The front case body 730 is a member that holds a pair of link members 770 in a slide-displaceable manner between the front case body 710 and the intermediate case body 710. It is mainly provided with a columnar pillar portion 732 which is arranged in front of the above and extends along the vertical direction.

The back surface 731a of the main body portion 731 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711 and the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 in the intermediate case body 710, and the link member 770 is tilted as described later. When rotated (displaced) from the upright state, the back surface 731a of the main body portion 731, the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711, and the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 are provided with respect to the front and back surfaces of the link member 770. Make a contact. As a result, the link member 770 can be rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the shaking of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. 54). can.

The pillar portion 732 is a portion for holding the guide rod 733 inside and sandwiching the link member 770 with the overhanging portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710, and the front surface (front side on the left side of FIG. 48) is opened. It is formed in a box shape. The guide rod 733 is a member for guiding the elevating and lowering of the elevating base body 780, and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section from a metal material. Be retained. In this way, the pillar portion 732 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface, and the guide rod 733 is housed inside the pillar portion 732, so that the guide rod 733 is arranged by utilizing the dead space. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the annular operation unit 700 as a whole.

As will be described later, the guide rod 733 is inserted into the guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780, and the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is set in the vertical direction (of the guide rod 733) via the guided portion 784. Guidance in the axial direction). In this case, the guide rod 733 is arranged in front of the tooth surface of the rack 762 (front side) and behind the elevating base body 780 (main body portion 781), and is therefore arranged as described later. It is possible to achieve both the effect of arranging the elevating base body 780 offset to the front side with respect to the rack 762 and ensuring the smooth elevating operation of the elevating base body 780.

The drive motor 740 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, and its drive shaft is projected to the back side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711). A first gear 751 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 740, and the second gear 752 to the sixth gear 756 are pivotally supported by the plurality of shafts 725 of the rear case body 720 on the first gear 751. Are meshed with each other in order, and a pinion gear 761 pivotally supported by a shaft 725 of the rear case body 720 is meshed with the sixth gear 756.

As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism consists of a pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762. The pinion gear 761 is rotatably supported by a shaft 725 of the rear case body 720, and the pinion gear 761 is interposed therebetween. Racks 762 are arranged facing each other with their tooth surfaces facing each other.

The rack 762 is provided with a tip guide piece 762a and a rear end guide shaft 762b at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction, respectively, and an insertion hole 762c is formed through the side of the rear end guide shaft 762b. .. The front end guide piece 762a is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped-shaped protrusion, and the rear end guide shaft 762b is formed as a shaft body having a circular cross section. As described above, the tip guide piece 762a and the rear end guide shaft 762b are inserted into the tip guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 of the rear case body 720, whereby the slide displacement (linear motion) of the rack 762 is caused. The direction is restricted to the extension direction of both guide grooves 723 and 724.

The pair of link members 770 are members for constituting a link mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted via the rack and pinion mechanism to the elevating base body 780 and the annulus forming member 790, and are members in the longitudinal direction. One side (base end) is connected to the rack 762, and the other side (tip) in the longitudinal direction is connected to the elevating base body 780 and the annulus forming member 790. Here, the detailed configuration of the link member 770 will be described with reference to FIG. 50.

50 (a) is a front perspective view of the link member 770, FIG. 50 (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50 (c) is a partial Lc of FIG. 50 (a). It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50 (d) is a side view of the link member 770 in the arrow Ld direction view of FIG. 50 (a).

The link member 770 has a long plate-shaped main body portion 771, an insertion shaft 772 projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 771 on one side (base end) in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 771, and the insertion shaft 772 thereof. A protruding wall portion 773 projecting from the front of the main body portion 771 on the other side (tip) of the main body portion 771 on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, and a gear portion disposed at the protruding tip of the protruding wall portion 773. It is equipped with 774.

As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is a shaft body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion shaft 712 of the intermediate case body 710. The protrusion wall portion 773 is a portion for offsetting the arrangement position of the gear portion 774 toward the front surface (front) side of the main body portion 771, and is projected from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at a protrusion height h. The gear portion 774 includes a shaft support hole 774a formed through the center and a plurality of teeth 774b engraved on the outer periphery around the shaft support hole 774, and the shaft of the elevating base body 780 is provided in the shaft support hole 774a. The 782 is inserted (shaft support) and is meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring-forming member 790 via the teeth 774b.

In the present embodiment, the gear portion 774 (tooth 774b) is formed as a spur gear whose tooth streak direction is parallel to the axial direction, and the tooth 774b of the gear portion 774 extends over the entire wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774. Will be engraved. Therefore, even when the gear portion 774 is displaced relative to the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 to be meshed due to the bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) (FIGS. 48 and 48). 49), the teeth 774b extending and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774 can be meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring forming member 790, and these gears can be fitted accordingly. It is possible to prevent the portion 774 and the gear portion 792 from being disengaged from each other. Further, even when the relative displacement due to the above-mentioned deflection or twist occurs and the gear portions 774 and 792 are relatively displaced in the axial direction, the teeth extended and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774. Since the meshing area between the gear portion 774 (tooth 774b) and the gear portion 792 (tooth 792b) can be secured by the amount of 774b, uneven wear of each of these teeth 774b and 772b is suppressed and the durability thereof is improved. Can be planned.

Here, for example, if the main body portion 771 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outward in the radial direction) of the gear portion 774, it is easy to secure the area of the seat surface on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. However, in the present embodiment, since the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end face) of the gear portion 774, the portion of the protruding wall portion 773 can be secured on the axial end face of the gear portion 774. The area of the seat surface is reduced.

In this case, in the protruding wall portion 773, the wall surface on the side opposite to the wall surface on which the tooth 774b of the gear portion 774 is extended and engraved (the wall surface on the axial center side of the shaft support hole 774a) is the shaft support hole 774. Since it is formed as a concave curved surface curved in an arc shape centered on the axis, the shaft of the gear portion 774 even when the projecting wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end face) of the gear portion 774. The area of the seat surface can be secured on the directional end surface, and the diameter of the collar C (see FIG. 49) arranged on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 can be increased accordingly. Further, when the link member 770 (main body portion 771, the protruding wall portion 773 and the gear portion 774) is integrally molded from the resin material, the protruding wall portion 773 is on the side opposite to the wall surface on which the teeth 774b are formed. By forming the wall surface as a concave curved surface, the wall thickness as a whole including not only the projecting wall portion 773 but also the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 can be made uniform, and the formability thereof can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the protruding wall portion 773 is engraved with the teeth 774b over the entire surface thereof (that is, up to the portion connected to the front surface of the main body portion 771), so that a region in which the teeth 774b are formed is sufficient. It is possible to more reliably suppress the disengagement of the annulus forming member 790 from the gear portion 792 (see FIGS. 48 and 49). Further, as described above, when the link member 770 (main body portion 771, the protruding wall portion 773 and the gear portion 774) is integrally molded from the resin material, the teeth 774b are extended only to the middle of the protruding wall portion 773. In each case, the wall thickness of the projecting wall portion 773 can be made uniform over the entire area, and the formability thereof can be further improved.

As described above, in the link member 770, the protruding wall portion 773 is projected from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at the protruding height h, and the gear portion 774 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding wall portion 773. Since it can be installed, the gear portion 774 can be separated from the main body portion 771 by the protrusion height h of the protruding wall portion 773. That is, in the assembled state, the arrangement position of the elevating base body 780 can be separated (offset) from the rack 762 to the front (forward) by the amount of the protrusion height h of the protrusion wall portion 773 (FIG. 55). And FIG. 57). The effect of such offset will be described later.

It will be described back to FIGS. 48 and 49. The elevating base body 780 is a member that is moved up and down between the retracted position and the coupling position by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted via the link member 770, and is a member that moves up and down between the retracted position and the coupling position. A pair of shafts 782 that are projected from the center and support the gear portion 774 (shaft support hole 774a) of the link member 770, and a gear portion 792 (shaft support) of the ring forming member 790 that is juxtaposed below the pair of shafts 782. A pair of shafts 783 that pivotally support the holes 792a) and a pair of shafts 783 are arranged below the pair of shafts 783 on the back surface of the main body portion 781 and guided in the vertical direction by a pillar portion 732 (guide rod 733) of the front case body 730. A guided portion 784 to be guided and a cover body 785 arranged on the back surface of the main body portion 781 are mainly provided.

A plurality of insertion holes through which the guide rod 733 can be inserted are formed in the guided portion 784, and the guide rod 733 is inserted through the insertion holes so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is the axial direction of the guide rod 733. It is regulated only in the direction along.

The cover body 785 is a member arranged facing the axial end faces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 (see FIG. 51), and has a head having a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view. It is provided with a portion 785a and an extending portion 785b extending downward from the lower edge of the head in a band shape and having a width narrower than that of the head 785a, and these are integrally formed from a thin metal plate. .. As will be described later, when relative displacement occurs in the gear portions 774,792, the cover body 785 (head 785a and extension portion 785b) is brought into contact with the axial end faces of the gear portions 774,792. Therefore, the relative displacement can be suppressed, and the meshing state of the gear portions 774 and the meshing state of the gears 774 can be properly maintained.

The gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 were inserted with the shafts 782 and 783 inserted into the shaft support holes 774a and 792a of the gear portions 774 and 792, respectively. By fastening and fixing the fastening screw while interposing a collar C having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support holes 774a and 792a at the tip of the shafts 782 and 783, the shafts are rotatably supported by the shafts 782 and 783. To.

The pair of annulus-forming members 790 are rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted via the link member 770 and are members for forming an annulus shape at the coupling position, and the annulus shape is abbreviated. It mainly includes a main body portion 791 formed in a shape divided into two, and a gear portion 792 arranged on one side (base end) in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 791. The gear portion 792 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the elevating base body 780 and is meshed with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. It is provided with a plurality of teeth 792b engraved on the outer periphery thereof.

A magnet (not shown) is embedded in the other side (tip) of the main body portion 791 on the opposite side to the side where the gear portion 792 is arranged in the circumferential direction to form an annular shape at the coupling position. (See FIG. 47), the tips of the annulus forming members 790 can be brought into close contact with each other by using the magnetic force of the magnet. As a result, it is possible to reliably form an annulus shape by the pair of annulus forming members 790.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a connection state between the link member 770, the elevating base body 780, and the annulus forming member 790 will be described. FIG. 51 is a partially enlarged rear view of the annulus operation unit 700. Note that FIG. 51 illustrates a state in which the elevating base body 780 is arranged between the retracted position and the coupled position, and corresponds to the state of FIG. 54, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the elevating base body 780, the tips (gear portions 774) of the pair of link members 770 are pivotally supported by the pair of shafts 782 (see FIG. 49), and the pair of shafts 783 (see FIG. 49). (See 49), the base ends (gear portions 792) of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are pivotally supported, and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annulus-forming member 790 are meshed with each other.

Therefore, as will be described later, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 transfers the gear portion 774 (shaft 782, see FIG. 49). It is rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780 as a center, and the rotation is transmitted to the annulus forming member 790 via the mesh between the gear portions 774 and 792, so that the annulus forming member 790 is rotated to the gear portion 792 (shaft). 783, see FIG. 49) is rotated with respect to the gear portion elevating base body 780. At the same time, the pair of link members 770 are raised or tilted with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730, so that the elevating base body 780 is moved up and down with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730 (FIG. 52). See FIG. 57).

Here, the elevating base body 780 is connected to the tip of the link member 770 formed in the shape of a long plate, and the elevating operation is performed with respect to each case body 710, 720, 730 via the link member 770. Occasionally, the link member 770 (main body 771) is likely to vibrate or sway in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 51) due to bending or twisting of the elevating base body 780. Further, the annulus forming member 790 itself is formed in the shape of a long plate, and the tip opposite to the base end connected to the elevating base body 780 is a free end. It is easy to generate vibration and shaking with respect to the elevating base body 780. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the magnet is embedded in the tip of the annulus forming member 790, the weight of the tip is increased, and the annulus forming member 790 is more likely to generate vibration or shaking.

Such vibration or shaking of the elevating base body 780 in the front-rear direction causes a relative displacement between the link member 770 and the elevating base body 780. That is, it causes a relative displacement between the gear portion 774 integrally formed with the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annulus forming member 790. Similarly, vibration or shaking of the annulus forming member 790 with respect to the elevating base body 780 causes a relative displacement between the gear portion 792 integrally formed with the annulus forming member 790 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. .. Therefore, the meshing state of the gear portions 774 and 792 becomes unstable, and not only the rotational operation of the annular ring forming member 790 and the elevating operation of the elevating base body 780 cannot be performed properly due to poor transmission of the driving force, but also the gear portion 774. , 792 wear is promoted, resulting in a decrease in durability.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cover body 785 is arranged on the back surface of the elevating base body 780, and the cover body 785 is used as the axial end face of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. It is arranged so as to face each other. As a result, the link member 770 (main body 771) bends or twists to cause vibration or sway in the elevating base body 780 or the ring-forming member 790, and even if relative displacements try to occur between the gears 774 and 790. By abutting the cover body 785 (head 785a and extending portion 785b) on the axial end faces of the gear portions 774 and 790, the relative displacement between the gear portions 774 and 792 is suppressed, and the meshing thereof is suppressed. The state can be kept properly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission failure of the driving force, to properly perform the rotational operation of the annular ring forming member 790 and the elevating operation of the elevating base body 780, and to suppress the wear of the gear portions 774 and 792. Durability can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the head portion 785a of the cover body 785 is arranged above the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the extended portion 785b of the cover body 785 is the link member 770. It is arranged between the gear portions 774 and between the gear portions 792 of the ring forming member 790. Therefore, of the axial end faces of the gear portions 774 and 792, the side opposite to the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 and the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 with the shaft 782 and the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) interposed therebetween. The head portion 785a and the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785 are brought into contact with the axial end faces thereof, and the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 can be effectively regulated.

For example, when the link member 770 is in an upright state or is in a state close to the upright state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 51), the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is sandwiched with respect to the main body portion 771 of the link member 770. Since the head 785a of the cover member 785 is arranged on the opposite side, the head 785a of the cover body 785 effectively displaces the gear portion 774 due to the bending and twisting of the main body 771 of the link member 770. Can be regulated. Similarly, for example, when the link member 770 is in a tilted state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 52) or is in a state close to the tilted state, the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) with respect to the main body portion 771 of the link member 770. ) Is placed on the opposite side of the cover member 785. It can be effectively regulated by 785b.

On the other hand, the annulus forming member 790 is left and right (left and right in FIG. 51) of the gear portion 792 regardless of its rotational position (that is, whether the link member 770 is in the upright state or the tilted state). Since the main body portion 791 of the annulus forming member 790 is arranged, the extending portion of the cover member 785 is located on the opposite side of the main body portion 792 of the annulus forming member 790 with the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) interposed therebetween. By arranging the 785b, the displacement of the gear portion 792 due to the bending and twisting of the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 can be effectively regulated by the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785.

In the present embodiment, each gear portion 774 of the pair of link members 770 is not only meshed with the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 located below the gear portion 774, but also the gear portions 774 adjacent to each other on the left and right sides. Is also toothed. Similarly, each gear portion 792 of the pair of annulus forming members 790 is not only meshed with each gear portion 774 of the link member 770 located above the gear portion 792, but also meshed with the gear portions 792 adjacent to the left and right. Will be done.

As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the rotational operation of the pair of annulus forming members 790. That is, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and further transmitted from the pair of link members 770 to the pair of annulus forming members 790 (FIG. FIG. 48 and FIG. 49). In this case, the pair of racks and pinions 762 of the rack and pinion mechanism are independent of each other with respect to the pinion gear 761. Therefore, when the pair of rack members 770 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are also independent of each other, the amount of phase shift (for example, backlash amount and dimensional tolerance) of the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 is the pair of racks 762. Further, the phase shift amount of the link member 770 with respect to the rack 762 (for example, the amount of rattling of the insertion shaft 772 with respect to the insertion hole 762c) differs between the pair of link members 770, and further, the ring forming member with respect to the link member 770. The amount of phase shift of 790 (for example, the amount of rattling of the shafts 782 and 783 with respect to the shaft support holes 774a and 792a, or the amount of rattling of the teeth 792b with respect to the teeth 774b) differs between the pair of ring-forming members 790. By accumulating the phase shifts of the above, the phase shift occurs in the rotational operation of the pair of ring forming members 790, and the synchronization accuracy is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are meshed with each other, and the gear portions 792 of the pair of ring forming members 790 are meshed with each other. Therefore, the above-mentioned phase shift causes the driving force. Even if it occurs in the transmission path of the above, the phase shift does not appear in the rotational operation of the annulus forming member 790 (that is, the phase shift can be absorbed at the most downstream of the driving force transmission path). As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy in the rotational operation of the annulus forming member 790.

Next, the operation of the annular operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57. In this description, FIGS. 46 to 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 52 is a schematic rear view of the annulus operation unit 700 schematically showing the annulus operation unit 700 in which the pair of annulus forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 53 is a schematic view of the back of the annulus operation unit 700. It is sectional drawing of the annulus operation unit 700 in line LIII. FIG. 54 is a schematic rear view of the annulus operation unit 700 schematically showing the annulus operation unit 700 in which the pair of annulus forming members 790 are arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annulus operation unit 700 in the LV-LV line of FIG. 54. FIG. 56 is a schematic rear view of the annulus operating unit 700 schematically illustrating the annulus operating unit 700 in which the pair of annulus forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling positions, and FIG. 57 is a schematic rear view of the annulus operating unit 700. FIG. It is sectional drawing of the annulus operation unit 700 in the LVII line.

In FIGS. 52 to 57, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, an outer shell structure including an intermediate case body 510, a rear case body 520, and a front case body 530, a drive motor 740, and a gear group (No. 1). The drive structure including the 1st gear 751 to the 6th gear 756) or the cover body 785 is not shown. However, in FIGS. 52, 54 and 56, the positions of the upper edges of the main body portion 711 and the overhanging portions 713 (front 711a, 713a) of the intermediate case body 710, and the main body portion 731 (rear surface 731a) of the front case body 730. ), The positions of the upper edges are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in a state where the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged in the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are deployed in a direction in which they are separated from each other, and the tip side (tip guide piece 762a) thereof is deployed. The tooth surface on the side) is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, the pair of link members 770 whose base end side (insertion shaft 772) is pivotally supported by the rear end side (insertion hole 762c) of the pair of racks 762 is in an tilted state, and the pair of link members 770 The elevating base body 780 on which the tip side (gear portion 774) is pivotally supported is arranged at the lowermost position. Further, the pair of annulus forming members 790 are deployed (distributed to the left and right) in a direction away from each other.

When the drive motor 540 is driven from this state (a state in which the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged in the retracted position) and the rotational driving force thereof is transmitted to the pinion gear 761 via the gear group (FIGS. 48 and 49). (See), the pinion gear 761 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 52, and as the pinion gear 761 rotates, the pair of racks 762 shortens its deployment length (the insertion holes 762c on the rear end side are close to each other). It is linearly moved in the direction of making it). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually erected by being displaced toward the center (that is, toward the directions close to each other) on the proximal end side (insertion shaft 772).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, a relative rotation of the pair of link members 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780 is formed, and the rotation is caused by the gear portions 774 and 792 of the pair of annulus forming members. By transmitting to the 790, the pair of annulus forming members 790 is rotated relative to the elevating base body 780, and the tips of the pair of annulus members 790 are brought close to each other. At the same time, the standing motion of the pair of link members 770 forms a relative displacement of the elevating base body 790 with respect to the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gears 761 and rack 762), and the elevating base 790 is raised.

As described above, in the annular operation unit 700, the elevating base body 780 is pivotally supported at the tip of the pair of link members 770 whose base end is pivotally supported by the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 stands or tilts. The elevating base body 780 can be raised and lowered, and the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 whose base end is pivotally supported by the elevating base body 780 is meshed with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. The ring-forming member 790 can be rotated by the relative rotation of the link member 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780.

That is, the means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the elevating base body 790 (means for raising and lowering) and the means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the annulus forming member 790 (means for rotating) are individually provided. Since it is not necessary to provide the link member 770 and the link member 770 can be used in combination, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, the rotational movement of the annulus forming member 790 and the linear motion in the vertical direction can be performed in parallel, that is, the annulus is not formed in a fixed position but is changed in the vertical direction. Since the annulus is formed in order, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are meshed with each other, and the link member 770 is fitted through the meshing of these gears 774 and 792. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, as the standing of the pair of link members 770 progresses, the position of the center of gravity becomes higher, so that the link is transmitted. The bending and twisting of the member 770 (main body 771) causes vibration and shaking of the elevating base body 780 (and the pair of ring-forming members 790) in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 54 and left-right direction in FIG. 55). It becomes easier (the amount of displacement in the front-back direction becomes larger).

The bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body 771) or the annulus forming member 790 (main body 791) or the vibration or shaking in the front-rear direction was integrally formed with the link member 770 and the annulus forming member 790. By affecting the gear portions 774 and 792 and relatively displaced the gear portions 774 and 792, there is a possibility that the teeth of the gear portions 774792 may be disengaged. Even if it is possible to prevent the gears 774 and 792 from being out of alignment, the tooth engagement state (dental area) becomes unstable and the surface pressure is concentrated on a part of the tooth surface, so that the tooth 774b , 792b may be unevenly worn and the durability may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the link member 770 is engraved with the teeth 774b extended on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 773 connecting the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 (see FIG. 50). ), Even when the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 described above occurs, it is possible to easily maintain the tooth engagement between the gear portions 774 and 792 by the extension of 774b. As a result, not only the disengagement of the teeth can be suppressed, but also the state of the teeth can be stabilized, the uneven wear of the teeth 774b and 792b can be suppressed, and the durability thereof can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position (specifically, the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761). The rack is placed at an intermediate position in the relative movable range), and when the standing angle of the pair of link members 770 reaches a predetermined angle, the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 and the teeth engraved on the protruding wall portion 773. The tooth 774b connected to the 774b (see FIG. 50) starts meshing with the tooth 792b in the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790.

Therefore, the range from the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 to the state shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 described later (that is, the elevating base body 790 vibrates in the front-rear direction due to the large standing angle of the link member 770). In the range where vibration is likely to occur and the teeth of the gears 774 and 792 are most likely to come off), the teeth 774b extending and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 773 can be effectively utilized. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the disengagement of the gears 774 and 792 or improve the durability of the teeth 774b and 792b.

From the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pinion gear 761 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52 by driving the drive motor 740, and the pair of racks 762 further shortens the unfolded length (rear end). When the side insertion holes 762c are linearly moved in a direction (direction in which they are close to each other), the pair of link members 770 are erected substantially vertically. That is, the direction connecting the shaft 782 of the elevating base body 780 (see FIG. 49) and the insertion shaft 782 of the link member 770 is substantially vertical. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pair of annulus forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling positions, and the tips of the pair of annulus forming members 790 are brought into contact with each other to form an annulus shape. It is formed.

In this case, when the pair of annulus forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position (that is, when the pair of link members 770 are upright to the upright state (posture along the vertical direction)), these pair of link members. A connecting portion between the pillar portion 732 of the front case body 730 and the overhanging portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 between the facing surfaces of the 770 (in this embodiment, see the head 713b of the overhanging portion 713, FIGS. 48 and 49). Is interposed, and the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion (head 713b of the overhanging portion 713) are in contact with the facing surfaces of the pair of link members 770 (see FIG. 56). The posture of the elevating base body 780 that supports the annulus forming member 790 and its pair of annulus forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

That is, at the coupling position, the pair of link members 770 are in an upright position, and the center of gravity is raised, so that the pair of link members 770 rotate left and right (in the left-right direction in FIG. 56) about the insertion shaft 772. At the same time, the rack 762 is easily moved in the direction of its linear motion (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) in response to the left-right rotation of the pair of link members 770. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the postures of the link member 770 and the rack 762, and as a result, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 arranged at the tip of the link member 770 also become unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a connecting portion (overhanging portion) between the front case body 730 (pillar portion 732) and the intermediate case body 710 (overhanging portion 713) is provided between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members 770. Since the head 713b) of the 713 is interposed, the connecting portion (head 713b) rotates the pair of link members 770 in the left-right direction around the insertion shaft 772 and in the direction of the linear motion of the rack 762. Can regulate the movement of. As a result, the pair of link members 770 can be maintained in an upright state, and the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

Further, since the pair of the link members 770 are arranged so as to face each other substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction (left-right direction of FIGS. 52, 54 and 56), the link members 770 are tilted relatively downward (for example, from FIG. 52). In (up to 55), the pair of link members are arranged facing each other so that the pair of link members 770 try to rotate left and right (in the left-right direction of FIGS. 52 and 54) about the insertion shaft 772. The 770s can cancel each other out and maintain their posture.

On the other hand, the link member 770 may be formed in a flat plate shape, and it is difficult to maintain its posture with respect to the displacement in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. 54). In this case, in the present embodiment, the base end side (insertion shaft 772 side) of the link member 770 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the intermediate case body 710 and the front case body 730. That is, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state, the front case body 730 (main body portion 731) with respect to the front and back surfaces of the link member 770 on the proximal end side. The back surface 731a and the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the shaking of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 54). Can be done. As a result, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 can be elevated and lowered while stabilizing their postures.

In particular, in the present embodiment, an overhanging portion 713 is formed so as to project upward in the central portion in the width direction of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and the overhanging portion 713 is formed. , As shown in FIG. 56, the position of the upper edge of the front surface 713a is raised (that is, it abuts on the back surface of the link member 770) as it approaches the central portion in the width direction (that is, as the link member 770 is erected). The possible area is increased).

In this way, instead of raising the position of the upper edge of the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) as a whole, the position of the upper edge is raised by partially raising only the central portion. The more the link member 770 approaches the upright state, the more the overhanging portion 713 is suppressed, while suppressing the appearance from being spoiled by the wall surface of the intermediate case body 710 (or the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced). The contactable area between the front surface 713a and the back surface of the link member 770 can be widened to enhance the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member 770 (suppressing the swing in the front-rear direction). As a result, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) in the vicinity of the upright state while suppressing the appearance from being spoiled. That is, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 can be stably held in the stopped state at the coupling position, and the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 in the vicinity of the coupling position. Can be raised and lowered while stabilizing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the overhanging portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 is a pair of link members whose front surface 713a is retracted to the retracted position (that is, tilted to the lowermost position). The shape is set so that it can abut on the back surface of the 770 (see FIG. 46). As a result, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are stably held in the stopped state at the coupling position, and the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are located in the vicinity of the coupling position. The elevating base 780 and the elevating base 780 arranged at the retracted position (bottom) by using the portion (overhanging portion 713) where the height position of the upper edge is raised for the purpose of raising and lowering while stabilizing the posture of the body. At the same time, the effect of stably maintaining the posture of the pair of ring-forming members 790 in the stopped state can be obtained.

From the state shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, when the drive motor 740 is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the above-mentioned case, the pinion gear 761 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 56, and the pinion gear 761 is rotated. Along with the rotation, a pair of racks 762 are deployed (that is, linearly moved in a direction in which the insertion holes 762c on the rear end side are separated from each other). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually tilted, and as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are retracted to the retracted position.

Here, in the annulus operating member 700, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 act on the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762) via the pair of link members 770. Will be done. That is, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 are acted on in the direction of deploying the pair of racks 762 via the pair of link members 770. Therefore, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 may be lowered from the coupling position. In this case, the elevating base body 780 is restricted from descending (that is, the elevating base body 780 is coupled) by countering the driving force of the drive motor 740 against the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790. In the structure (held in position), the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the projecting wall portion 773 is interposed between the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the projecting height of the projecting wall portion 773 is interposed. The gear portion 774 is offset from the main body portion 711 to the front (front) side by the amount of h (see FIG. 50 (d)). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the elevating base body 780 is in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack 762 (that is, the paper surface of FIGS. 54 and 56). On the front side (left side of FIGS. 55 and 57), the thickness dimension of the link member 770 (that is, the total dimension of the thickness dimension of the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 and the protrusion height h of the protrusion wall portion 773). It is offset (separated) from the rack 762 by the amount.

As a result, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 are also acted on the rack 762 via the link member 770 in the offset direction described above. That is, as a force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770, a force component in the direction in which the elevating base body 780 is offset can be generated, and a force component for moving the rack 762 in the moving direction by that amount can be generated. Can be made smaller. As a result, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, at the coupling position, the link member 770 is erected in a posture along the vertical direction, and the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the elevating base body 780 and the link member 770 are inserted. The direction connecting the shaft 772 is substantially orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack 762. Therefore, when the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 acts on the rack 762 via the link member 770, the rack 762 acts as a force component on the rack 762 from the link member 770. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction in which the link member 770 is tilted (that is, the direction in which the link member 770 in the upright state is tilted). As a result, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 can be held at the coupling position, and as a result, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 is consumed. Can be suppressed.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the distance T1 between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) is the insertion shaft of the pair of link members 770. It is made smaller than the horizontal distance T2 between 772s (T1 <T2). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are erected in a posture slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (that is, a posture in which the pair of link members 770 are in a V shape). In this way, by keeping the pair of link members 770 in a C-shaped posture, the drive motor 740 is described above in order to start the operation from the state (coupling position) shown in FIG. 56 to the retracted position. When the rotation drive is performed in the opposite direction to the case, the deployment of the pair of racks 762 (that is, the tilting of the pair of link members 770) due to the rotation drive can be easily and surely started.

In particular, in the present embodiment, a magnet is embedded in the tip of the main body portion 791 of the annulus forming member 790, and the tips of the main body portions 791 are magnetized, so that even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released. , The elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position. On the other hand, when starting the operation from the coupling position to the retracted position, it is necessary to release the magnetic force of the magnet. In this case, keeping the pair of link members 770 in a V-shaped posture (that is, setting T1 <T2) keeps the bonded state at the bonded position and starts the operation from the bonded position to the retracted position. It is particularly effective in terms of achieving both the release of the combined state of time and the certainty of both.

Here, the magnet embedded in the tip of the main body portion 791 of the annulus forming member 790 may be omitted. In this case, the distance T1 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 and the distance T2 in the horizontal direction between the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 are abbreviated. It is preferable that they are the same (T1 = T2) or that the former is larger than the latter (T2 <T1). As a result, even when the driving force of the driving motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annulus forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position.

In the present embodiment, the guide rod 733 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the tooth surface of the rack 762 and on the back side (right side in FIG. 57) of the elevating base body 780 (main body portion 781). Will be done. Further, the guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780 through which the guide rod 733 is inserted is arranged at the lowermost position of the elevating base body 780 (main body portion 781). That is, in the direction of the forward offset of the elevating base body 780 with respect to the rack 762, the portion where the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members. A guide rod 733 is arranged at a position between the position of the center of gravity of the structure made of 790, and the elevating base body 780 is guided up and down via the guide rod 733 and the guided portion 784. With such an arrangement, it is possible to achieve both the effect of arranging the elevating base body 780 offset to the front side with respect to the rack 762 described above and ensuring the smooth elevating operation of the elevating base body 780.

Next, the rocking operation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64.

As described above, the swinging operation unit 800 includes two arm members 820 (see FIGS. 7 and 11), and is composed of two units for operating (displacement) both arm members 820. That is, the swinging operation unit 800 is composed of two units that are above the inside of the rear case 210 and are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a in the front view of the rear case 210. In this case, the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) the arm member 820 is the same in the two units, and therefore, in the following, one of the two units (on the left side of the opening 211a). The arranged unit (see FIGS. 7 and 11) will be referred to as a swinging operation unit 800.

FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the swinging operation unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 59 is a swinging operation unit in a state where the arm member 820 is extended to the overhanging position. It is a front perspective view of 800.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the swinging operation unit 800 includes an arm member 820 whose base end is rotatably supported, and a drive motor 830 that applies a rotational driving force to the arm member 820. The arm member 820 is swung (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 58 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. 59. At the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of hanging vertically downward and retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400, so that it cannot be seen by the player (see FIG. 6). At the protruding position, the arm member 820 is in a posture in which the tip thereof is lifted upward and tilted diagonally downward, and the tip thereof is projected to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5).

In this case, in the present embodiment, when the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 59, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the overhanging position as described later. Therefore, it is not necessary to counteract the driving force of the drive motor 830 so that the arm member 820 does not rotate toward the retracted position due to the action of gravity (its own weight), and the arm member 820 is moved to the overhanging position by that amount. The energy consumption of the drive motor 830 required for holding can be suppressed. This detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking operation unit 800 when the disassembled rocking operation unit 800 is viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 61A is a rear view of the swinging operation unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 61B is a swinging motion in the partial LXIb of FIG. 61A. It is a partially enlarged rear view of the operation unit 800. Note that FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show the rocking operation unit 800 with the mounting base 810 removed.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the rocking operation unit 800 is pivotally supported by a mounting base 810 arranged on a rear case 210 (see FIG. 7) and a base end rotatably supported by the mounting base 810. An arm member 820, a drive motor 830 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the arm member 820, and a front case body 840 that is arranged in front of the mounting base 810 as well as the drive motor 830. , Is mainly provided.

The mounting base 810 is a member for accommodating the base end of the arm member 820 and the drive motor 830 between the front case body 840 and the front case body 840, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view. The mounting base 810 is provided so as to project from the front surface thereof and include a shaft 811 for rotatably supporting the arm member 820.

The arm member 820 has a main body portion 821 formed in a long shape, a groove portion 822 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the base end side of the main body portion 821, and a main body portion 821 on the side opposite to the groove portion 822. A decorative portion 823, which is covered on the front surface on the tip side of the above and is formed as a decorative body, and a shaft support hole 824, which is formed through the main body portion 821 at a position between the decorative portion 823 and the groove portion 821. Mainly prepared for.

The groove portion 822 is composed of a first groove 822a extending linearly and a second groove 822b connected to one end of the first groove 822a and curved in an arc shape to extend, and both grooves 822a, It is formed as an L-shaped groove when viewed from the front from 822b. In other words, in the groove portion 822, the recess recessed in one of the inner wall surfaces of the facing inner wall surface of the first groove 822a is the second groove 822b.

The arc shape of the second groove 822b is such that the protrusion pin 833 is arranged at the end point of the first groove 822a (the connection position between the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) (see FIG. 63 (b)). Matches the arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Further, the groove widths of the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b are set to have the same dimensions as each other. Is rotatably supported with respect to the mounting base 810. In this case, the contact surface portion 841 of the front case body 840 is brought into contact with the arm member 820 on the front surface of the main body portion 821 and in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 824 (FIG. 61 (b)). reference). As a result, the arm member 820 is held in a state in which its base end is rotatable between the mounting base 810 and the front case body 840 facing each other.

The drive motor 830 has a plate-shaped drive arm 832 having a base end fixed to the drive shaft 831 and extending radially outward from the drive shaft 831, and a protrusion projecting from the tip of the drive arm 832. The setting pin 833 is mainly provided, and the projecting pin 833 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the front case body 840 with a fastening screw in a state where the projecting pin 833 is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820.

As described above, the projecting pin 833 is a portion inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, and has an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 822 (first groove 822a and second groove 822b) of the arm member 820. It is formed as a columnar body with a diameter. Therefore, when the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, the projecting pin 833 is moved in the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820 along the extending direction of the groove portion 822, and as a result, the arm member 820 is moved. Is rotated about the axis 811.

Next, the rocking operation of the rocking operation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. In this description, FIG. 61 will be referred to as appropriate.

62 to 64 are diagrams illustrating the process of operating the arm member 820 of the swinging operation unit 800 from the retracted position to the extended position in chronological order, with FIGS. 62 (a) and 63 (a) and FIGS. 64 (a) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit 800, and FIGS. 62 (b), 63 (b) and 64 (b) are partial LXIIb and FIG. 63 (a) of FIG. 62 (a), respectively. It is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit 800 in the partial LXIIIb of FIG. 64 (a) and the partial LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a).

In FIG. 62, the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, and the arm member 820 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the overhanging position. In FIG. 63, the arm member 820 is moved to the overhanging position. FIG. 64 shows a state immediately after the arrival, in which the arm member 820 reaches the overhanging position and the drive motor is further rotationally driven.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), in a state where the arm member 820 is arranged in the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of hanging downward, and the projecting pin 833 has a protruding pin 833. It is located at the starting point of the groove portion 822 in the first groove 822a (the end portion on the side opposite to the side connected to the second groove 822b, on the right side in FIG. 61B).

In this retracted position, the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion 821a projecting from the side surface of the main body portion 821 of the arm member 820 faces the regulation surface 812 on the side wall of the mounting base 810 at predetermined intervals. Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft 811 in response to an external force (for example, an external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine), the protrusion 821a hits the regulation surface 812. The rotation of the arm member 820 can be regulated by being brought into contact with the arm member 820, and the rotation can be quickly converged.

The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) (the state in which the arm member 820 is arranged in the retracted position), and the drive arm 832 is left in FIG. 61 (b). When rotated counterclockwise, the projecting pin 833 is moved toward the end point of the groove 822 in the first groove 822a (the side connected to the second groove 822b, the left side in FIG. 61B). ..

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), the arm member 820 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 61 (b) around the shaft support hole 824. As a result of the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 being further rotationally driven and the drive arm 832 being further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 62 (b), the protrusion pin 833 is the end point of the groove portion 822 at the first groove 822a. When it reaches, the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b).

Here, also in the conventional gaming machine, a driving force is applied to the first axis (corresponding to the axis 811), the moving member rotated around the first axis (corresponding to the arm member 820), and the moving member. A drive motor (corresponding to a drive motor 830) is provided, and the moving member is rotated around the first axis by the driving force of the driving means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640). In this case, when the moving member is arranged in the ascending position (corresponding to the overhanging position), it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (descending) due to the action of gravity. In this case, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the moving force of the driving motor is opposed to gravity (weight of the moving member) to regulate the movement (descending) of the moving member (that is, the moving member is held in the ascending position). Because of the structure, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member is high.

On the other hand, according to the swinging operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the arm member 820 can be extended by mechanically holding the arm member 820 at the overhanging position so that the driving force of the drive motor 830 can be released. The energy consumption required to hold the position can be suppressed.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the state shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) (the projecting pin 833 reaches the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822, and the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position. Immediately after that, the drive motor 830 is further driven to rotate. As a result, the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 62 (b), so that the projecting pin 833 has a groove portion 822 as shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b). Form a moved (accepted) state within the second groove 822b of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second groove 822b is connected to the end point of the first groove 822a (a recess is recessed in one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). In the state where the arm member 820 is arranged in the overhanging position, the projecting pin 833 is moved into the second groove 822b (on the inner wall surface of one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). Since the state (where the projecting pin 833 is received) is formed in the recessed recess, the arm member 820 is mechanically held in the overhanging position (the arm member 820 is centered on the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811)). It can be regulated to be rotated into). That is, even if the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the overhanging position, and the consumption of the drive motor 830 required to hold the arm member 820 in the overhanging position by that amount is consumed. Energy can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the protrusion pin 833 and the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811) are connected to the drive shaft 831 and the protrusion pin 833 in the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the protrusion pin 833. ) Is approximately orthogonal to each other, and the inner wall surfaces of the second groove 822b of the portion where the protrusion pin 833 is located are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the protrusion pin 833. Is formed like this.

Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811), the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b is directed in a direction corresponding to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Even if the arm member 820 is rotated to press the protrusion pin 833 and the protrusion pin 833 is pressed by the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b, the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 cannot be rotated. That is, the arm member 820 cannot be rotated.

Therefore, in a state where the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, even if the arm member 820 is shaken by, for example, a player hitting or shaking the gaming machine, the arm member 820 has a shaft support hole. Rotation around the 824 (shaft 811) can be restricted and, as a result, can be reliably held in the overhang position.

In this case, as described above, in the arc shape of the second groove 822b, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the protrusion pin 833 has the end point of the first groove 822a (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b). In the state of being arranged at the connection position), it matches the arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Therefore, when the protrusion pin 833 arranged at the end point of the first groove 822b is moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b (that is, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 63 to the state shown in FIG. 64). Since the movement locus of the projecting pin 833 and the shape of the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b match, it is possible to avoid the posture of the arm member 820 arranged at the overhanging position from fluctuating. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 63, after the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position, the posture of the arm member 820 at the overhanging position is suppressed from fluctuating (while maintaining the stopped state). The projecting pin 833 can be moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b to mechanically hold the arm member 820 in the overhanging position.

Here, the groove portion 822 has a shape (of the first groove 822a) in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the side opposite to the shaft support hole 824 (the side separated from the shaft support hole 824). Even if the inner wall surface of the inner wall surface facing each other has a concave portion recessed in the inner wall surface opposite to the shaft support hole 824), the arm member 820 can be mechanically held as in the case of the present embodiment. It is possible. However, in this case, after the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position, it is necessary to switch the rotation direction of the drive motor 830 when moving (accepting) the projecting pin 833 into the second groove 822b. This occurs, the control becomes complicated, and the reliability of the operation decreases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove portion 822 has a shape (first) in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the shaft support hole 824 side (the side close to the shaft support hole 824). 1 The shape is such that a recess is recessed in the inner wall surface of the inner wall surface of the groove 822a facing each other on the shaft support hole 824 side), so that the arm member 820 is retracted without switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 830. The recessed pin 833 can be moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b to mechanically hold the arm member 820 in the overhanging position. As a result, control can be simplified and the reliability of operation can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In the above embodiment, in the combined operation unit 400, the case where the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotary second gear 462 are formed through the main body portions 451a and 462a as through holes has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotary second gear 462 may be used as bottomed recesses. Even in the case of a bottomed recess, by inserting a jig into the recess by the same method as in the above embodiment, the mounting position and the like can be positioned, but compared with the case where the recess is formed as a through hole. As a result, the rigidity of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 can be ensured, so that the durability thereof can be improved.

In the above embodiment, in the composite operation unit 400, by making the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 different, the opening and closing operations of the operating members 491 and 492 are made non-parallel opening and closing, which is an effect. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the opening and closing operations of the operating members 491 and 492 are performed in a non-parallel manner by setting the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 to be the same. Of course, it is possible.

In the above embodiment, in the combined operation unit 400, the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 and the gear between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b of the second pinion leg member 483. The case where the ratio is the same has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 and the gear of the second pinion leg member 483 are described. The gear ratio between the portion 483c and the rack portion 481b may be different from the gear ratio. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be made non-parallel to open / close, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, in the composite operation unit 400, the case where both the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are toothed with the rack portion 481b has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only one of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 can be meshed with the rack portion 481b, and the other can be rotated to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 without meshing with the rack portion 481b. It may be only supported by the shaft. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be made non-parallel to open / close, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, in the composite operation unit 400, as the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operating members 491 and 492, the operation of continuously rotating the rotation first gear 461 and the opening / closing first gear 451 from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ4. However, the unit is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to divide the unit of operation within the range of the rotation angle θ0 to θ4.

In the above embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, a case where three insertion shafts 531c are arranged side by side in a row on the back surface of the A layer base plate 531 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The number of insertion shafts 531c in each row may be 2 or less, or 4 or more.

In the above embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are attached to the central insertion shaft 531c among the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically on the back surface of the A layer base plate 531. The case of connecting the above is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first link member 541 and the first link member 541 and the first link member 541 and the first link member 541c are attached to the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower insertion shaft 531c among the three insertion shafts 531c arranged one above the other. Two link members 542 may be connected.

In the above embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, a retaining ring E is provided as a retaining ring for the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c inserted into the shaft support hole 541a and the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541. The case where the retaining ring E as a retaining ring or the fastening of the fastening screw is omitted is omitted for the connecting shaft 526 inserted into the connecting hole 541b while the mounting or fastening screw is fastened. It is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the retaining ring E is attached or the fastening screw is fastened as a retaining ring at at least one of these three places.

<Detailed description of control processing in this embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described in detail. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for the fluctuation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 87). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) for storing special symbol holding balls, and is provided with a special symbol holding ball execution area. Has been done. In each area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 are set according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Each is stored.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the through gates 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 87).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 68 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1. However, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which it is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table for high-probability special symbols (see FIG. 68 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low-probability special symbols (see FIG. 68 (a)) are mainly used. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol at the time of a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number value "7" is added to the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/300".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/30".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 68 (b)), when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A (see FIG. 68 (b)). 16R probability change jackpot) ”. Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B (16R normal jackpot)".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 68 (b)). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 87) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (b)), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is mainly controlled. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described. The variation pattern selection table 202d has at least a variation pattern selection table 202d for big hits (see FIG. 69 (a)) and a variation pattern selection table 202d for deviation (see FIG. 69 (b)). Although omitted in the present embodiment, a dedicated variation pattern selection table for each game state for time saving and probability change may be set and set to be switched depending on the game state.

As shown in FIG. 69A, each of the hit / fail determination results of the special symbol 1 at the start of fluctuation and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 at the start of fluctuation are based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is configured to select a fluctuation pattern. Here, as the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the rough type and fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern are determined. Various types of "normal reach" and "super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns selected when the hit / fail determination result common to "big hit A" and "big hit B" is a big hit. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and if the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of reserved pieces. Here, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern that becomes "super reach" is set more easily to be selected than "normal reach". Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the frequency of the "super reach" fluctuation pattern being executed and becoming a big hit increases, and the player can hit the jackpot when the "super reach" fluctuation pattern is selected. Easy to have expectations.

In the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A, which is the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "normal reach", the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed for a predetermined time through the reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol. After the variable display, the variable display mode is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode. The fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "normal reach" is composed of a relatively short fluctuation time as compared with the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "super reach" described later.

The super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A to C, which are the jackpot fluctuation patterns of the "super reach", are displayed in the reach display mode as in the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A, and then the characters and the like are displayed to display the reach display mode. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is executed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in. The "super reach" fluctuation pattern is composed of a relatively longer fluctuation time than the "normal reach" fluctuation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69 (b), the deviation pattern selection table 202d for deviation will be described. The variation patterns selected when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is out of alignment are "short-time deviation (for short-time use)", "long-time deviation (for short-time use)", and "out-of-time variation pattern". "Out of normal reach" and "out of super reach" are stipulated. The short-time deviation variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of "short-time deviation", is composed of a variation time (800 ms) shorter than that of other variation patterns, and is not displayed in the reach display mode, but is a main symbol for a predetermined time. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the display mode in which the main symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-term deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of "long-time deviation", is composed of a fluctuation time (12000 ms) longer than that of the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach deviation variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of "normal reach deviation", is different from the normal reach jackpot variation pattern because the middle symbol string Z2 is finally stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the symbol of the reach display mode. It is a display mode showing that the configured lottery result is out of order. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be easier to select than the super reach deviation variation pattern described later when the hit / fail determination result is deviation. Further, the super reach deviation variation pattern, which is “super reach deviation”, is a different display mode in that it is finally displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation with respect to various super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns.

If the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct is incorrect, the ratio of the variation pattern selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4. The variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern so as to be different.

When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "short-time deviation" and is not selected. As a result, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long, and during that time, it becomes easy to insert the game ball into the first starting opening 64a and the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which the change of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which the lottery of the game is not executed).

Further, when the number of reserved pieces is 3 to 4, the rate at which the variation pattern of "short-time off" is selected is set to be large. As a result, when the number of reserved pieces is 3 to 4, which is close to the upper limit number, a short fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, so that even if the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the ball can be entered. It is possible to suppress the problem that the number of invalid balls exceeds the number of reserved balls.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through either the left or right through gate 67, and the RAM 203 It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 68 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 68 (c)) is for the low probability time of the normal symbol (the period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the probability of hitting the normal symbol from the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, as the hit type of the normal symbol, a normal hit and a long-time hit are set, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability gaming state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state is executed once with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. It is a hit to be done. Further, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with the opening time of 1 second is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a hit in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with an open time of 1 second is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

In this embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed in the probable variation period during the time reduction in the normal hit, and the opening operation in the long-time hit are set to be the same, but the opening operation is not limited to this, and the long-time hit is different. It may be an opening operation of. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ball enter the second winning opening 640 more when hitting for a long time, and it is possible to easily execute the variation display with the special symbol 2 during the normal game. It is possible to entertain the player with a change in the game effect by the variable display of the special symbol 2 in which a fresh notice display or the like is displayed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 20 at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is normal. It is determined to be a hit. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol. Therefore, at the time of low probability, the frequency of operating the electric accessory 640a can be reduced, and the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game ball by the player and increase the profit on the side of the game store by mainly allowing the ball to enter the first starting port 64a. On the other hand, during the time reduction and the probability change period, which have a high probability, the chance of the electric accessory 640a operating can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", and the chance of entering the second winning opening 640 is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball of the player and set the game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the game with a high probability, and can play the game for a longer time.

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol of "○" is lit and displayed. After that, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first starting port 64a is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the time of low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the first starting port 64a. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time is And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 79). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 87).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 66, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 87) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 88) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 85) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a time-saving / medium-time counter 203e, a probability change flag 203f, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data are four. Among the vacant areas of the hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. It is (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is obtained in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S404 in FIG. 82). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 82).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 80 and S405 in FIG. 82). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the hold ball number command to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (1). See S704 in FIG. 84). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 83).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the second random number counter C4 A value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 84). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (Fig.). 84 S703: No).

The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving medium counter 203e is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 80). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e becomes 0 (S217 in FIG. 80).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 68 (c)). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0, the normal symbol is drawn based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 68 (c)) for low probability time. A lottery is held (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 83).

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 85) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 70A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal background selection table 222b, a normal background notice selection table 222c, and a forced background notice selection table 222d. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 70B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop. Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, background selection counter 223g, variation mode selection counter 223h, time effect execution flag 223j, set time storage area 223k, effect mode storage area 223n, normal background mode storage area 223o, and other storage areas 223z. At least it is provided.

The sub-variation pattern selection table 222a shows the variation display mode of the special symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice content, and the lamp based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. It is a data table for selecting a variation pattern such as a lighting mode such as. In the fluctuation pattern output from the main control device 110, the fluctuation time, reach, non-reach, etc., which are rough fluctuation modes, are specified, and based on the contents, the voice lamp control device 113 has detailed contents. Is determined.

The sub-variation pattern selection table 222a in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 71 to 72. The sub-variation pattern selection table 222a and the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a (see FIG. 71) dedicated to the normal background mode correspond to the type of background mode (normal background mode or forced background mode) set later. It is composed of at least a sub-variation pattern selection table 222a (see FIG. 72) dedicated to the forced background mode. In addition, although there is a dedicated table etc. when the time is shortened or the probability is changing, the illustration and its explanation are omitted.

In the present embodiment, the details will be described later, but the background mode is set according to the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the normal background mode, four types of modes A to D are determined by lottery, and a background image corresponding to the mode is set. There are four types of background images: sea (normal A) as mode A, mountain (normal B) as mode B, river (normal C) as mode C, and valley (normal D) as mode D. 3 It is set as a background image of the symbol display device 81. In the forced background mode, the background image to be displayed during the time effect period is set. During the time production period, it becomes a background image in the sea and the remaining period of the time production period is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the background mode selected is configured so that the advance notice effect mode corresponding to the mode is selected. As the notice effect mode, a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect, a lighting mode of a lamp, and the like are set.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the sub-variation pattern selection table dedicated to the normal background mode, each variation pattern is configured to be selected based on the variation mode selection counter (not shown) according to the hit / fail determination result. ing. Since there is only one type of variation pattern for each of the short deviation and the long deviation, which is the variation pattern selected when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, the main control device is irrespective of the selected variation mode selection counter. The configuration is such that short deviation and long deviation fluctuation patterns are selected according to the type of fluctuation pattern output from 110.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the sub-variation pattern selection table dedicated to the forced background mode, each variation pattern corresponds to the hit / fail determination result as in the case of the sub-variation pattern selection table dedicated to the normal background mode. It is configured to be selected based on the value. The content of the selected variation pattern is different between the sub-variation pattern selection table dedicated to the normal background mode and the sub-variation pattern selection table dedicated to the forced background mode in that the background dedicated to the time effect period is selected. Although there is no substitute for the variation time and variation type (reach out, out of reach, reach hit, etc.) of the selected variation pattern, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different. In the sub-variation pattern selection table dedicated to the forced background, the variation pattern is dedicated to the time effect period, and specifically, the effect of being in the sea corresponding to the background image is mainly displayed.

The normal background selection table 222b is a data table for determining the normal background mode. FIG. 73 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal background selection table 222b. When selecting a variation pattern, the normal background selection table 222b acquires the value of the background selection counter 223g, which will be described later, and corresponds to the value and the type of variation pattern to be selected (reach type, short / long deviation, etc.). By collating with the judgment value set in the above, the normal background mode set in the judgment value is selected.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit and the type of the selected fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the judgment value of the normal background mode A is "0 to 15", and the normal background. "16 to 60" is set as the determination value of the mode B, "61 to 90" is set as the determination value of the normal background mode C, and "91 to 100" is set as the determination value of the normal background mode D. Here, since the background selection counter 223g is a counter value updated in the main process in the range of "0 to 198", when the value of the background selection counter 223g that is not set as the determination value is acquired. Normally, the background mode change will not be executed. Further, even when the same normal background mode as the normal background mode currently set in the normal background mode storage area 223o is selected, the change of the normal background mode is not executed.

Further, in the normal background selection table 222b, since the judgment value is set so that the normal background mode D is selected only when the hit / fail judgment is successful, the normal background mode D is selected and the background of the valley is the first. 3 When it is displayed on the symbol display device 81, it can be determined at an early stage that it is a big hit. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the background of the valley will be switched and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the normal background selection table 222b, if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the normal background mode A is set to be more difficult to be selected than in the case of being out of order, and conversely, the normal background modes B to C are out of order. It is set so that it is easier to select when it is a hit than when there is a certain case. As a result, the player expects that if the background image of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to any of the background modes B to C at the start of the change of the special symbol, it will be a big hit. be able to. In particular, since the normal background mode C is set to be easier to select than the normal background mode B when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the background image corresponding to the normal background mode D is displayed. It is possible to make the player have the expectation for a big hit.

Further, even if the background image is switched to the background image corresponding to the normal background modes B and C and the fluctuation of the special symbol is out of alignment, the expectation for a big hit is expected unless the background image is switched to the background image corresponding to the normal background mode A. Can be continuously embraced by the player. Also, even if the background image corresponding to the normal background mode A is displayed, it is set to be selected when the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, so the game can be played without any expectation for the big hit. It is possible to suppress disappointment of a person.

The normal background notice selection table 222c (see FIG. 74 (a)) is a selection table for selecting a notice display mode (notice content) corresponding to the selected normal background mode. 3 While the special symbol is being changed on the symbol display device 81, a character image, characters, or the like for suggesting to the player the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct or not is displayed. Further, the notice display mode selected in the normal background notice selection table 222c is set to a dedicated notice display mode corresponding to the selected normal background mode.

Specifically, in the normal A dedicated notices 1 to 3 selected when the normal background mode A is selected, sea creatures (for example, crabs, dolphins, etc.) are selected, and the normal B dedicated notices 1 to 3 are selected. Then, mountain creatures (for example, crabs, bears, etc.) are selected, and in normal C-only notices 1 to 3, river creatures (for example, medaka, amenbo, etc.) are selected, and in normal D-only notices 1 to 3, Valley creatures (eg, cranes, hawks, etc.) are preset to be selected.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the normal background notice selection table 222c, the hit / fail judgment result of the changing special symbol is hit for each of the normal background modes, and the judgment value of the effect counter 223f is divided into two. Is set for each notice display sun. The effect counter 223f is a counter value that is updated in the same manner as other counters every time the main process (see FIG. 87) is executed in the range of “0 to 198” (the process is not shown). When a counter value that is not set in the normal background notice selection table 222c is acquired, the notice display mode is not selected. Further, since the notice display mode is set to be easier to select in each normal background mode than in the case where the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the player can select the notice display mode. Can be expected to win the lottery result of the special symbol that is changing. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of the display of the notice display mode.

The notice display mode set in the normal background notice selection table 222c is based on the internally selected normal background mode even when the forced background is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is the configuration to be selected. With this configuration, various notice display modes can be displayed even when the forced background mode is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. Further, as will be described later, since the notice display mode dedicated to the forced background mode is also displayed, the player can predict the degree of expectation for the jackpot by combining the respective notice display modes.

The forced background notice selection table 222d (see FIG. 74 (b)) is dedicated to the forced background mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the forced background mode is set (when the time effect period is set). It is a selection table for selecting the notice display mode of. As the notice display mode dedicated to the forced background mode, the forced exclusive notices 1 to 4 are set respectively, and the notice display modes such as a school of fish and coral are set. Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the determination value of the effect counter 223f is set for each notice display mode corresponding to the hit / fail determination result. Here, since the case where the hit / fail determination result is a hit is set so that the notice display mode is more easily selected than the case where the notice display mode is wrong, the player is changing due to the selection of the notice display mode. It can be expected that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol will be a hit. Further, when the forced background mode is set, as described above, the notice display mode of the normal background mode is set. Therefore, even when the notice display mode dedicated to the forced background mode is not selected, it is normal. By selecting the notice display mode of the background mode, it is possible to have more expectations for the jackpot. In addition, since many types of notice display modes are easily displayed, the game can be played with the expectation of shifting to the forced background mode.

Next, returning to FIG. 70 (b), the contents of the RAM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start prize. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The winning information storage area 223a is also referred to when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit with a special symbol. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit of a special symbol, and when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, the big hit effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the opening effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be from now on. This is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state and displays the time saving period (notifies the player of the game value (normal symbol time saving period) given to the player after the end of the big hit). Or, it is an effect for displaying a final effect (notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the reserved special symbol lottery).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command from the main control device 110, the winning information storage area 223a is referred to, and is there any winning information indicating a big hit of the special symbol in the stored winning information? If there is prize information indicating a jackpot of a special symbol, the jackpot type corresponding to the prize information is acquired.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or in the main control device 110, the variation in the special symbol. When the display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially. It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 30). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is used. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the second symbol. Based on the hold ball number command of the second symbol received from the main control device 110, the hold ball number indicated by the command is stored.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 91), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 93). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 91), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 93). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223f is a counter value for effect used when the voice lamp control device 113 executes a notice display mode, a lottery for effect, and the like. The effect counter 223f is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198", and although not shown, the update process is performed by the main process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Is executed. The effect counter 223f is configured to be counted and updated by software, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect counter 223f may be configured to be updated by a counter circuit that counts using a clock terminal or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to update at high speed regardless of the control process of the MPU 221. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the same counter value is selected every time.

The background selection counter 223g is a counter for selecting the normal background mode from the normal background selection table 222b. The background selection counter 223g is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198". The background selection counter 223g is set so that the update frequency is different so that the process of being updated in the main process (see FIG. 90) is executed as in the effect counter 223f, but it is not synchronized with the effect counter 223f. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the background selection counter 223g and the staging counter 223f from synchronizing with each other.

The variation effect mode selection counter 223h is a counter used when a variation pattern is selected from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a. The variation effect mode selection counter 223h is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198". The variable effect mode selection counter 223h is updated in the main process (see FIG. 90), but the update frequency is different so as not to be synchronized with the effect counter 223f and the background selection counter 223g. Is set to.

The set time storage area 223k is a storage area in which time information for executing the time effect is stored. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the current time information is acquired from the RTC292 by the process of S1221 of the time setting process (FIG. 89, S1212) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113. To. Then, by the process of S1224, the start time for executing the time effect of 10 minutes every hour is calculated from the acquired time, and the start time until the elapse of 24 hours is stored in the set time storage area 223k. Will be done. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 sets the mode B indicating that the time is the time effect period when the time of the set time storage area 223k is reached, and sets the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol into the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the forced background mode. (See FIG. 72) Switch to select from. Then, when it is determined that 10 minutes, which is the time effect period, has elapsed, the effect mode A other than the time effect period is set, and the variation pattern is selected from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal background mode. Be done.

As a result, by connecting a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in advance to the power supply device so that the power can be turned on at the same time and turning on the power all at once, the same power-on time can be obtained for each pachinko machine 10. The start period of the same time effect can be stored in the time setting storage area 223k. Therefore, the time production is started at the same timing in each pachinko machine 10, and the background image (in the present embodiment, the image in the sea) corresponding to the selection of the fluctuation pattern and the forced background mode can be switched to, so that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be used. It is possible to create a sense of unity across the board.

The effect mode storage area 223n is a storage area for storing data indicating either the effect mode A, which is an effect mode other than the time effect period, or the effect mode B, which is the effect mode during the time effect period. The type of the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a for determining and selecting the current mode state is switched based on the data set in the effect mode storage area 223n.

The normal background mode storage area 223o is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the normal background mode selected from the normal background selection table 222b. The background image corresponding to the normal background mode stored in the normal background mode storage area 223o is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the effect mode A other than the time effect period is set. When the effect mode B within the time effect period is set, the background image corresponding to the forced background mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the period in which the effect mode B is set is set. Even so, the process of switching the normal background mode is executed, and the type of the normal background mode determined by this process is stored in the normal background mode storage area 223o.

In the present embodiment, even during the period of the effect mode B in which the forced background mode is set, the notice display mode of the normal background mode is set to the type of the normal background mode set in the normal background mode storage area 223o. It is selected based on the above and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even within the time effect period, the data stored in the normal background mode storage area 223o can be updated to switch the displayed notice display mode, and various effects can be provided to the player. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The other memory area 223z is an area in which various data used in game processing, counters, flags, and the like are set.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 91) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 75.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 95) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 95) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 78) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 97B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed may be deleted. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the variable image at the time of turning on the power, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 95).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the variable image when the power of the "○" symbol is turned on at the lower right position facing the screen and the variable image when the power is turned on of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the variable image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, an effect mode storage area 233m, and a background change flag 233n.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol. As the ball becomes easier to enter the first prize opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when superposition processing with other sprites is performed. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. In this back type, information for specifying a background image (any of the sea, mountains, rivers, valleys, and underwater) corresponding to the normal background modes A to D and the forced background mode is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the above-mentioned back image, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the normal background mode A to D or the forced background mode is to be displayed depending on the back surface type, the MPU 231 is set to the normal background image storage area 223o in the effect mode A. By the normal background mode (determined by the command output based on the update of the normal background mode by the voice lamp control device 113), if the effect mode B, the rear image corresponding to the forced background mode is specified as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the background image described above, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 76). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 78) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 77). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 77).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 77, in the example of FIG. 77). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 78) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 77, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display an image at power-on (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) on the third symbol display device 81 (not shown). The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 95) (see S1805 in FIG. 95). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 105 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 97 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 97 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 97 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 97 (b) see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 98 to 101) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 102 to 104) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 105 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 105 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 106) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 78), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 78), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 78) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 97 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 104) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 78) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 78, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 97 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 102). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 106). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 106). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 107).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 97 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 107).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The effect mode storage area 233 m is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the effect mode indicated by the display effect command output based on the effect mode set by the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear surface change flag 233n is a flag indicating that a display rear surface command has been received from the voice lamp control device 113. The rear change flag 233n is S2701 of the display rear command process (FIGS. 101, S2213) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 113 when the display rear command output from the voice lamp control device 113 is received. Set to on by processing. On the other hand, it is set to off in the process of S3414 in the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 106, S3303).

The background change flag 233n is used to determine that it is time to change the rear image, and the display mode is changed to the rear image indicated by the rear image discrimination flag 233o described later and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The processing to be performed is executed.

The background image discrimination flag 233o is a storage area in which a flag corresponding to the background image indicated by the display rear command output from the voice lamp control device 113 is stored. In the present embodiment, the dedicated rear image discrimination flag 233o corresponding to each of the normal background modes A to D (sea, mountain, river, valley) and the dedicated rear image discrimination flag 233o corresponding to the forced background mode are set in advance. The rear image discrimination flag 233o corresponding to the received command is set to on. The other rear image discrimination flags 233o are set to off based on the fact that the rear image discrimination flag 233o is newly set to on.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 79 to 87. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (299, 99, respectively in this embodiment, respectively). When it reaches 239), it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 79), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 87) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the process of S207 is executed, the special symbol change start process is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process (S208) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 81, but the process of starting the variation of the first symbol and the third symbol (starting the dynamic display) is executed. To. On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 81. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A or a big hit B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability, which is a probability variation period (S213). After that, the process of S215 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot B, 100 is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S214). After that, the process of S215 is executed. Then, in the process of S215, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1. If it is the above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S217), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol change start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 80) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail determination) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform rows. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect.

In the special symbol change start processing (S208), first, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution area is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (S302). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag (not shown) is on. This probability variation flag is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the pachinko machine is in the probable change state (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S303. In the processing of S303, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time ( S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the processing of S304, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability time ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability one by one. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "7" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes a hit of these match, the special symbol Judged as a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and there are two types of special symbol jackpots (big hit A, Among the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot is A (16R jackpot, the probability change period from the jackpot game to the next jackpot), and "60 to". If it is in the range of "99", it is determined that it is a jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times in a short time period of a normal symbol).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are performed from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 69 (a)) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. , "Shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined as the variation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, and the variation patterns for jackpot C are "special". Various types of "reach" are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss.

In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 69 (b)) is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. ) Refer to) to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as complete deviation, normal reach, super reach, etc.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 87). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the starting winning is won. This is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol from the reserved values indicated by the various random number counters.

When the start winning process (FIG. 82, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (N). ) Is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes). The value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 87) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, each counter value acquired in S407, the current gaming state (whether it is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state), and each data of the reserved ball stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the above, the hit / fail determination result at the start of the fluctuation is determined (S407). It is said that the lottery result is pre-read because the processing of S407 is determined before the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol is determined at the start of the fluctuation.

It is determined whether the pre-reading determination result in the process of S407 is a big hit (S408). When the pre-reading determination result is determined to be a jackpot (S408: Yes), a jackpot winning command is set (S409). This jackpot winning command indicates to the voice lamp control device 113 that the look-ahead result is a jackpot, and a command indicating the information of each counter value acquired in S406 and the determination result is generated.

On the other hand, in the process of S408, when it is determined that the look-ahead result is out of order (S408: No), the out-of-order winning command corresponding to the stop type is set (S410). This off-winning command is a command for the voice lamp control device 113 to indicate that the pre-reading determination result is out of order, and a command that can also determine the information of each counter value acquired in S406 is generated. After the processes of S409 and S410 are executed, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor attached to the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is trying to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second winning opening 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, the second winning opening Many balls enter the 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 68 (c)) for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 68 (c)) for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 68 (c)).

In the process of S608, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 68 (c)) for the probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 68 (c)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,21 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is judged that it is out of the normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is currently underway. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the electric accessory associated with the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first starting port 64a is set to 0. It is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the first starting port 64a is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 87) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 87) is executed, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is controlled. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if the ball has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 84, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S703). : No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d The value (M) is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S912. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 29, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 79), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 79) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 80) and the start winning process (see FIG. 82) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 87) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a has elapsed, or a ball is placed in the specific winning opening 65a. Determine if you have won the specified number. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 83), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 81), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 81) ends, the first symbol display device is used. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 81) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). When the variation time of the second symbol is set, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 83), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The variable display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001 and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 85 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load of the main control device 110, and it is possible to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 94, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1318 (see FIG. 90) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 88, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 90), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1318. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1318 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data is transferred to the S1208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1318. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 90). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1208 is performed via the processing of S1204 to S1206. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the time setting process is executed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, a time setting process (S1212), which is one of the start-up processes (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time setting process (S1212).

In the time setting process (FIG. 89, S1212), first, the current time information is acquired from RTC292 (S1221). Here, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an RTC 292 capable of measuring the current time. The RTC292 is provided with a power supply means (button battery or the like) capable of operating without being supplied with electric power from the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the time can be measured even when the pachinko machine 10 is not supplied with electric power.

Further, in the RTC292, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, the time information is set by a predetermined jig so that the time information measured by the RTC292 attached to each pachinko machine 10 in advance is synchronized. As a result, the timekeeping information synchronized with the RTC292 of each pachinko machine 10 can be timed.

It is determined whether the time information acquired in the process of S1221 is within the deadline data (within 3 years in this embodiment) (S1222). When it is determined that the time information is within the deadline (S1222: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223j is set to ON (S1223). Based on the acquired time information, the time production period is calculated and set in the set time storage area 223k (S1224). Here, in the present embodiment, as the time effect every hour, an effect of switching to a background image dedicated to the time effect and a variation pattern is executed. Therefore, in the process of S1224, the time when one hour has elapsed from the time information acquired in the process of S1221 is calculated as the start time of the first time effect, and then another hour has elapsed after the time effect period of 10 minutes. The time is set as the second time production period. Similarly, the start time of the time effect between the time acquired in S1221 and 24 hours later is calculated and stored in the set time storage area 223k. Normally, the business hours of pachinko parlors are 14 hours from 9:00 to 23:00, so if you set a start time for 24 hours, you can handle even if the business hours are a little longer.

In this embodiment, the power-on time is acquired from the RTC292, and the start time of the time effect is calculated and set from that time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power-on time is stored. , RTC292 may be configured to discriminate the time information and execute the time effect when a predetermined time (1 hour in the present embodiment) has elapsed. Further, a 60-minute counter may be set based on the power-on time acquired from the RTC292, and the counter may be updated to determine the start timing of the time effect.

If it is determined in the process of S1222 that the acquired time information is data outside the deadline, this process is terminated. Here, since the time effect execution flag 223j remains off, the time effect is not executed. In this way, since the time effect is set not to be executed after three years have passed, the power of the battery or the like, which is the internal power source of the RTC292, is reduced, the timing accuracy is lowered, and the RTC292 of each pachinko machine 10 is set. Due to the variation in the time to be measured, it is possible to suppress the problem that the start timing of the time effect varies in each pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S1302 to S1310, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1311, the command determination process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal display execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). The details of this command determination process (S1311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 91. Next, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In this variation display setting process (S1312), a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. .. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. When the processing of S1312 is completed, the synchronization effect management processing is executed (S1313). This synchronous effect management process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. 94.

When the processing of S1313 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the variation pattern selection process is executed (S1403).

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection process (S1403) will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403).

In the variation pattern selection process (S1403), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1501). Next, the value of the background selection counter 223 g is acquired. Then, based on the acquired value of the background selection counter 223g, the type of the background mode is selected from the normal background selection table 223b (see FIG. 73) (S1503). Here, when the same background mode as the currently selected normal background mode is selected, the same background mode is set. On the other hand, when a different background mode is selected, that background mode is set and the displayed background is changed. On the other hand, even if the background selection counter has no background mode setting, the background mode is not changed and the currently set background mode is maintained as it is.

In the process of S1503, it is determined whether the normal background mode different from the normal background mode stored in the normal background mode storage area 223o is selected, that is, whether the normal background mode has been changed (S1504). When it is determined that the change of the normal background mode has been drawn (S1504: Yes), the normal background mode selected in the process of S1503 is set (stored) in the normal background mode storage area 223o (S1505). A display background command indicating the selected normal background mode (indicating the normal background mode newly set in the normal background mode storage area 223o in the process of S1505) is set (S1506). After that, the process of S1507 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1504, when it is determined that there is no change in the normal background mode (S1504: No), the process of S1507 is executed.

In the process of S1507, it is determined whether the effect mode currently set in the effect mode storage area 223n is the effect mode A (game state other than the time effect period). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1507: Yes), the value of the variation mode selection counter 223h is acquired, and based on the value, the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal background mode (S1507: Yes). (See FIG. 71), the variation pattern corresponding to the type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is selected (S1508). Notice from the normal background notice selection table 222c (see FIG. 74 (a)) based on the selected normal background mode (normal background mode stored in the normal background mode storage area 223n) and the value of the effect counter 223f. The effect mode is selected and set (S1509). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, when it is determined that the set effect mode is not the effect mode A, that is, the effect mode B (S1507: No), the variation mode selection counter 223h is acquired and its value. Based on the above, a variation pattern corresponding to the type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is selected from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a (see FIG. 72) dedicated to the forced background mode (S1510). Notice from the normal background notice selection table 222c (see FIG. 74 (a)) based on the selected normal background mode (normal background mode stored in the normal background mode storage area 223n) and the value of the effect counter 223f. The effect mode is selected and set (S1511). Based on the value of the selected effect counter 223f, the advance notice effect mode is selected and set from the forced background advance notice selection table 222d (see FIG. 74 (b)) (S1512).

In this way, during the time effect period in which the effect mode B is set, the background image corresponding to the forced background mode is switched and displayed, but the preview effect corresponding to the normal background mode is also set to the forced background mode. Corresponding notice effects can also be selected and displayed. As a result, various notice effects can be displayed even in the forced background mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored during the time production period.

Further, as shown in the processing after S1507, when the time effect period is in effect, the advance notice effect dedicated to the forced background mode and the advance notice effect dedicated to the normal background mode are selected. Here, even during the time production period, the normal background mode is changed when the fluctuation pattern is set, so that it is possible to switch the type of notice selected during the time production period, which is rich in variety. The notice effect can be displayed even during the time effect period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Next, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 91. In the process of S1401, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control unit 110 (S1404). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 93) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1407). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), the hold ball number command reception process is executed (S1408).

In the process of S1407, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1407: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1409). Then, when the winning command is received (S1409: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S1410). After that, it returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the main control device 110 acquires each value of each counter C1 to C3, and the value thereof is acquired. The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b, respectively. Further, as soon as the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired in the main control device 110, the original values of the acquired counters C1 to C2 are selected separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the process of S1409, if the winning command has not been received (S1409: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1419). Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 93, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern is processed in S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 91). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, and this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 91). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708). Based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the synchronization effect management process (S1313), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the contents of this synchronous staging management process (S1313). In this synchronous staging management process (S1313), the time information is determined from RTC292, and the current staging mode is the period of the staging mode A (outside the time staging period) or the period of the staging mode B (within the time staging period). It is determined whether this is the case, and the process of switching the effect mode is executed.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 94, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223j is set to ON (S1710). If it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223j is off (S1710: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223j is on (S1710: Yes), the time information of "hours and minutes" is acquired from RTC292 (S1711). It is determined whether the effect mode B is set (S1712). When it is determined that the effect mode B is not set, that is, the effect mode A is set (S1712: No), the time information (time information) acquired in S1711 is stored in the set time storage area 223k. It is determined whether it is the start timing of the time production period (S1713). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the time effect period (S1713: Yes), the data corresponding to the effect mode B is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1714). A display effect command indicating that the effect mode B has been entered is set for the display control device 114 (S1715). A display background command is set to instruct the display control device 114 to change to a background image corresponding to the forced background mode (S1716). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1712, when it is determined that the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223n is the effect mode B (S1712: Yes), the acquired time information is the effect start period (timing of the effect start). It is determined whether it is outside the period (10 minutes from the period) (S1717). When it is determined that it is outside the effect start period (S1717: Yes), the data corresponding to the effect mode A is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1718). A display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the effect mode A has been entered is set (S1719). A display background command for notifying the display control device 114 to change to a background image corresponding to the set normal background mode is set (S1720).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 107, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 95, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 95) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 95) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S1801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 96, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the process of S1902, the process of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the process of S1903 to S1905 may be executed without performing the process of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary staging unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 95. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1803, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 105 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 105 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 97 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn. The determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 97 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 97 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the variation pattern command for display is received, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Since is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1805, the interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 97 (a). FIG. 97A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 97B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 78) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. 3 The command determination process (S2102) is executed so that the symbol display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101.

In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), which are determined by the task process (S2104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 78 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the missed, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed to shift to the process of S2104.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 98, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. 99A. FIG. 99A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2302e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 98. In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. 99 (b). FIG. 99B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either jackpot A, jackpot B, reach, or complete loss) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S2401), and the stop type is determined. The table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 97 (b)) is executed, and the stop after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is compared. The symbol is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2403).

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2104), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 98, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display effect command (S2208). If it is determined that there is a display effect command (S2208: Yes), the display effect command process is executed (S2209).

Here, the display effect command process (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (a). FIG. 100A is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect command process (S2209).

In the display effect command process (FIG. 100 (a), S2209), first, the effect mode corresponding to the received command is set in the effect mode storage area 233 m (S2501). After that, this process ends.

Next, the explanation returns to FIG. 97. In the process of S2208, when it is determined that there is no display effect command (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display notice command (S2210). If it is determined that there is a display notice command (S2210: Yes), the display notice command process is executed (S2211).

Here, the display advance notice command processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (b). FIG. 100B is a flowchart showing the contents of the display advance notice command processing (S2211).

In the display notice command process (FIG. 100 (b), S2211), first, the display data table of the notice display mode corresponding to the received command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2601).

Returning to FIG. 98, the explanation will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S2212 that there is no display notice command (S2210: No), it is determined whether or not the display background command is received (S2212). If it is determined that the display background command has been received (S2212: Yes), the display background command process is executed (S2213).

Here, the display background command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 101 (a). FIG. 101A is a flowchart showing the contents of the display background command processing (S2213). In the display background command processing (FIG. 101, S2213), first, the background change flag 233n is set to ON (S2701). By setting this background change flag 233n to on, it can be determined that it is time to change the background image.

It is determined whether the received command is a command indicating that the background image is changed to the background image corresponding to the forced background mode (S2702). When it is determined that the command indicates to change to the background image corresponding to the forced background mode (S2702: Yes), the rear image discrimination flag 233o of the rear image corresponding to the forced background mode is set to ON (S2703). ). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2702, when it is determined that the command does not indicate the forced background mode, that is, the command indicates that the background image is changed to the normal background mode (S2702: No), the effect mode A is set. It is determined whether it is set (S2704). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S2704: Yes), the rear image discrimination flag 233o corresponding to the changed rear image type is set to ON (S1705). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2704 that the effect mode A is not set (S2704: No), this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 98. In the processing of S2212, if it is determined that there is no display background command (S2212: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2214), and if there is an error command, it is determined. (S2214: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2215), and the process returns to S2201 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. 101 (b). FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2802). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S2902. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 98. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2214 (S2214: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

In the processing of S2201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2219 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2218 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 97B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Extract only the type commands, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 99 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 99 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and perform other processes. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 99A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 102, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 102. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3201, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3203: No). S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 102 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2104), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed and the demo effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 97B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to stop and display the image (“◯” or “×”) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the details of the transfer setting process (S2105) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 105A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (b). FIG. 105B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. When it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 97 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 97 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 97 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 98 to 101) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 102 to 104) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 106) (see S3301: No in FIG. 105 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Further, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is determined whether the background change flag 223n is on (S3509). When it is determined that the background change flag 233n is on (S3509: Yes), the background change flag 233n is set to off (S3510), and the background image change flag 233n is set to on based on the rear image discrimination flag 233o. The back image is specified and set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233o in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

In the process of S3513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The discrimination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3513: Yes), the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set (S3514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3514, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2104) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α-blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 78 is generated (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S3602 (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 97B) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and used resident from the state of the signal. You may check whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can perform the access. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scan is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is a transfer data that is not full data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time during which important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed in the display control device 114. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process, and the MPU 231 is used as image data. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the address is used. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 with the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. It may contain a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240). You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (command code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is configured even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from. good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is transmitted to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the migrated image is not read out). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the migration image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power-on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data can be completed from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be configured to be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are input. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. When the power is turned on, the image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the main image at power-on and the power-on time stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is used. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error command. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on to determine that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process. By executing the warning image setting process, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the intentional entry of the ball into the entry port due to the change in the flow of the ball due to the magnetic field such as a magnet. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main control device 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, and the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined by the display control device 114 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 is determined. May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone in the time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data size of the display data table.

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the load of processing required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation effect can be expressed by, for example, the present invention. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data table corresponding to the specified paper for the variation effect is put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 before the definite display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the final display effect is displayed until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demo effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on and the power on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of turning on the power is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of turning on the power of the resident video RAM 235, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the fluctuation display by the fluctuation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, a transfer instruction for image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is used in the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear image is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach that appears frequently or is expected to be high in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data specified in 1 to the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. good. Further, as a rear image, not only an object that scrolls or changes in color tone with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with the third symbol display device 81. Is provided with another 4th symbol display device, and even if a continuous advance notice effect is executed by displaying the 4th symbol on the 4th symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the 3rd symbol display device 81. good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the lighting unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37) performs a variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. However, the sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed, and continues the game, but displays the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player is given an unusual effect. It can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning is performed. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the hit / fail determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous warning effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control device can be assigned to each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the fourth symbol display device, the operation in a predetermined mode of the accessory, the voice from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. This makes it possible to execute a wider variety of continuous notice effects. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). Or, by changing the combination thereof), even if a plurality of continuous advance notice effect modes selected according to the game state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, time saving big hit, miss) after the end of the continuous advance notice effect are prepared. good.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the case where the image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is completed. In this case, in the stop type command processing (see FIG. 37) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and other stop symbol discrimination is performed. You may want to set the flag off. In the command judgment processing, since the continuous advance notice command processing is executed after the stop identification command processing, the chance eye is set as the stop symbol instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command, so that the variable stop is performed. Sometimes the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of various counters (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3) acquired at the time of starting winning. The case where the information is included in the reserved ball count command has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various counters (random number counter C1 per first, type counter C2 per first) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command are described. , The information of the stop type selection counter C3) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 has a special symbol in which the winning command is performed based on various counters (first winning random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3) acquired at the time of starting winning. After including various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) indicating the lottery result, the winning command was transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 was included in the winning command. According to various information (win / fail, stop type, change pattern), the lottery result of the special symbol performed corresponding to the hold ball held at the time when the winning command is transmitted and the stop type after the change effect are estimated and estimated. The case of deciding whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect based on the result and the number of reserved balls held at that time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main control device 110 uses the values of the various counters acquired at the time of the start winning, and the values of the various counters (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3) corresponding to the start winning. May be included in the winning command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 may determine whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect based on the notified various counter values. Further, the main control device 110 may perform continuous advance notice effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning and the stop type after the variation effect, which is estimated from the values of various counters acquired at the time of the start winning. Whether or not it is determined, at least the determination result is included in the winning command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 finally performs a continuous advance notice effect based on the judgment result. May be determined. Further, the main control device 110 determines whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, includes the determination result in the winning command and notifies the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 determines the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. You may decide only. As information to be included in the winning command, information on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the estimated start winning, information on the stop type after the fluctuation effect, information on whether or not continuous notice effect may be performed, or continuous notice effect is performed. By using the information as to whether or not the winning command is included, the command size of the winning command can be reduced as compared with the case where the values of various counters are included. In addition, the information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated start winning prize, the information on the stop type after the fluctuation effect, the information on whether or not the continuous advance notice effect may be performed, or the information on whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is performed can be obtained. It may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command different from the winning command.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by the continuous advance notice determination process (S1410) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 33), and the continuous advance notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the decision to execute the continuous notice effect and the mode of the continuous notice effect may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous advance notice image type used in the continuous advance notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in response to the reception of this command. May be good. As a result, it is possible to start the transfer of the image data of the continuous advance notice image type used in the continuous advance notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 even before the variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type is used by the continuous advance notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect in a sub area dedicated to the continuous advance notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous advance notice image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being repeatedly transferred.

Further, the stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous advance notice effect. As a result, the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous advance notice effect is the last, and therefore, while the continuous advance notice effect is being performed, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used in the continuous advance notice effect. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily canceled.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the display variation pattern command includes information on the implementation of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice image type, a display data table that does not correspond to the continuous advance notice image for each variation pattern and each continuous advance notice image are included. A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 displays the corresponding display data table according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type. Data table buffer. It may be set to 233d. That is, the display data table may include both the drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous advance notice effect corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Therefore, since the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type may be given in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the data table.

In the above embodiment, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is the voice lamp control device based on the stop symbol (front / rear disengagement reach, non-front / rear disengagement reach, complete disengagement reach) determined by the main control device 110. The case where the setting is made by 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed, the last suspended symbol for stopping the variable effect is set. If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set by replacing it with the stop symbol of the front-back off reach mode instead of the stop symbol defined by the main control device 110. As a result, the stop symbol of the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol defined by the main control device 110, but always reaches the front and back, so that the player has a high expectation. be able to.

In the above embodiment, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed together with all the reserved variation effects, each variation effect is performed in an effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each change. , The effect mode of the variation effect other than the last reserved variation effect may be changed to the out-of-order variation effect. Then, by the process of generating the display variation pattern command in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1704 in FIG. 37), the variation pattern is changed according to the setting status of the continuous advance notice effect and the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed. You may. If the stop symbol after the variation effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the variation effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the variation effect is displayed as it is based on the variation pattern determined by the main control device 110. You may. Here, even if the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation in which the jackpot does not appear as a result even though the corresponding variation effect mode is, for example, the super reach variation effect, the player's expectation However, the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed, and the variable effect other than the last executed variable effect is continuously performed in the off-variable effect, so that the variable effect is executed last. It is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the variable effect.

In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the continuous advance notice effect is not limited to this. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player in a situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first starting port 64a for starting the lottery of the big hit of the special symbol when the ball enters is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 so that the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the reserved ball number counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entry ports are provided, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines to start the continuous advance notice effect when the reserved ball number command is received, all the first ball entry ports are provided at that time. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed over the variable effect (reserved ball) held by the mouth. Further, in a pachinko machine in which a plurality of first ball entrances are provided and the variation effect held in one first entry port is preferentially executed, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous notice effect may be decided only when the ball is entered into the first entrance. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, so that the continuous advance notice effect is given to the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority. Is started, and when the variable effect is continuously suspended at the first entrance with high priority, it is possible to prevent the situation where the continuous advance notice effect does not end easily.

In the above embodiment, the hold ball number command is mainly controlled every time the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines to start the continuous advance notice effect when the winning command is received, the continuous advance notice effect is executed for all the variable effects held at that time. As described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, it may be further determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous advance notice effect, and the effect that does not make the player bored is performed. Can be done. In this case, the counter is updated every time the continuous advance notice determination process (see FIG. 31) is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variation effect is set. It may be provided. Then, in the continuous advance notice determination process, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed (S1517: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect is limited to a predetermined value. , You may start the continuous notice production. Further, in this case, the number (range) of a predetermined value of the counter for setting the continuous advance notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the conditions. As this condition, for example, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b when determining whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous advance notice effect, and the variation pattern of the variable effect for which the determination is made. , The game state (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, missed) after the end of a series of continuous notice effects, or a combination of two or more of these. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in each variable effect is changed according to the conditions, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect. ..

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a continuous warning flag or an error occurs instead of a command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114. Various flags such as flags are generated, and based on the flags, the display data table and the transfer data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as warning images are generated. Alternatively, you may set a transfer instruction for the required image data.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64a is different by the number of the reserved balls in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or by the area divided into four. It may be displayed in an embodiment (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertical. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the staging display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 117. In the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of the effect of rotating the rotating member. The difference is that the control for matching the stop timing of the variation display and the timing at which the rotating member stops at a predetermined stop position is executed. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the production of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the contents of the effect in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG. 108 is a time chart for an example in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed in the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a lottery as to whether or not to execute the pseudo variation based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. Here, the pseudo-variation is a variation that makes one variation of the special symbol appear as if it is a plurality of variations of the special symbol. In the pseudo-variation, the third symbol is completely stopped after the fluctuation start and the provisional fluctuation stop are performed a plurality of times within the fluctuation time of the special symbol of 1. This allows the player to appear to be performing multiple variations. Further, in the pseudo-variation, the number of pseudo-variations (the number of times the special symbol starts to change) is configured so that it is easier to set the number of times when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit than when it is out of order. Even a player who recognizes that it is a pseudo-variation can enjoy the game by looking forward to how many times the special symbol fluctuates during one fluctuation (how many pseudo-variations are set). It can be carried out.

In the pseudo-variation shown in FIG. 108, it is a time chart showing an example when the number of pseudo-variations is set to four. When the change start of the special symbol is set, the change start is displayed for the first time for a predetermined period, then changes for a predetermined time, and then temporarily stopped. In this case, the third symbol is temporarily stopped at a chance such as "335". During the temporary stop, the third symbol is slightly swayed and displayed as a swaying fluctuation. Even in this temporarily stopped state, the dynamic display of the first symbol does not change and continues. After a temporary stop for a predetermined period (about 2 seconds), the second pseudo-variation is started (variation shown in pseudo-variation 1).

FIG. 109A is a diagram showing the third symbol display device 81 and the rotating member 300 when the pseudo-variation shown in the pseudo-variation 1 is started. Here, shortly after the third symbol starts to fluctuate (after 0.5 seconds, etc.), the rotating member 300 starts rotating as shown in FIG. 108 (b). Here, after the third symbol starts the second pseudo-variation, the rotation of the rotating member 300 is started with a slight delay, after that, the fluctuation time elapses and the third symbol starts rotating. The timing of temporary stop and the timing of the rotating member 300 stopping at a predetermined position (in the present embodiment, the position where "2" is displayed is directly above) in a high-speed state (see FIG. 110). In order to make them match, the rotation of the rotating member 300 is started with a time delay adjusted according to the fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 110, when the pseudo-variation time set in the pseudo-variation 1 elapses, the third symbol is displayed in a combination indicating the chance eye of "335". In the present embodiment, the chance eye is a combination in which the left symbol of the third symbol and the middle symbol are the same, and only the right symbol is different. The chance eye may be set as the reach eye, or may be appropriately set as long as it is a combination other than the jackpot.

At the timing when the third symbol is temporarily stopped at the chance, the rotating member 300 is stopped at a position where "2" stops directly above while maintaining the high speed state. Then, the character "continue" indicating that the pseudo-variation is continued is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the number shown on the surface of the rotating member 300 indicates the number of times the pseudo-variation is executed, and is configured so that it can be determined how many times the pseudo-variation is performed in the fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, when a winning command is received, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute a pseudo-variation in which the main symbol is varied and displayed a plurality of times in a predetermined time in one variation of the special symbol. When it is determined that the pseudo-variation is to be executed, the main symbol is varied and displayed by the number of times determined by lottery within the variation time previously determined by the main control device 110. In addition, until the variation display time of the special symbol elapses, when the main symbol is stopped, it is shaken and fluctuated, and after being stopped and displayed in the state of temporary stop, the variation is displayed again.

The fluctuation time in the pseudo-variation is set by lottery according to the number of pseudo-variations, at a time that does not exceed the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of pseudo fluctuations is four, so the time equal to or less than the fluctuation time allocated to the type of fluctuation pattern selected in advance by the main control device 110 by 4 is once. It is configured to be set by lottery as the time of pseudo-variation of. Then, the variation time is set for the number of times set in the lottery of the pseudo variation, and for the final pseudo variation, the total variation time of the pseudo variation selected so far is calculated from the variation time of the special symbol. The subtracted time is set as the fluctuation time.

Further, when each pseudo-variation is started, the rotating member 330 is stopped at a predetermined position so as to notify the player of the number of times. The rotating member 330 is provided with a number indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations on the front side, and when the position where the number is displayed is set to the top and the stop is displayed, the number displayed at that position. Shows the current number of pseudo-variations.

The rotating member 330 is controlled to have the same rotation speed each time. Therefore, if the fluctuation times of the pseudo fluctuations are different, it may be difficult to match the stop timing of the pseudo fluctuations with the stop timing of the rotating member 330. However, in the present embodiment, the rotation start timing of the rotating member 330 is delayed and set according to the time of the pseudo fluctuation, so that the stop timing of the pseudo fluctuation and the timing of stopping the rotating member 330 at a predetermined position are set. Can be matched.

In the present embodiment, the timing is controlled to be adjusted by delaying the rotation start timing, but the timing is not limited to this, and the rotation speed of the rotating member is changed according to the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation. By doing so, it may be configured to match the timing.

Further, when the timing is adjusted by varying the rotation speed, the rotation speed may be set to be increased each time the number of pseudo fluctuations increases. By setting in this way, the number of pseudo fluctuations can be notified to the player at the rotation speed of the pseudo fluctuations.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. The electrical configuration in the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment in that the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 111A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. The ROM 222 in the second embodiment has a pseudo-variation selection table 222e and a pseudo-variation second selection table 222f added to the first embodiment.

The pseudo-variation selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 112. When the pseudo-variation selection table 222e shows a variation pattern in which the winning command reaches, when the winning command is received, whether or not to execute the pseudo-variation is executed based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. It is executed by lottery.

In detail, as shown in FIG. 112, in the pseudo-variation selection table 222e, the number of pseudo-variations is set for each reach type corresponding to each of the hit / fail determination results and the misses. The lottery result is common to both hits and misses, and in normal reach, the maximum number of pseudo fluctuations is two. In addition, in the case of a hit, the maximum number of times for super reach and special reach is 4 times, and in the case of a miss, it is 3 times. As a result, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 4, the player can recognize that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit. Therefore, when the pseudo-variation is started, the player can play the game with the expectation that the pseudo-variation will be continuously executed and will not be continued up to four times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112, a plurality of pseudo-variation times are set for each reach type, and a determination value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to the number of times. Then, when the acquired value of the effect counter 223f and the determination value match, the pseudo-variation number set in the determination value is set. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f which is not set as the determination value is acquired, the lottery is performed unless the pseudo fluctuation is executed.

Further, a large number of determination values are set so that the pseudo-variation is more easily selected when the hit / fail determination result is correct. As a result, when the pseudo fluctuation is started, the player can play the game with the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the pseudo-variation will start, and can play the game with the goal of starting the pseudo-variation.

Next, the pseudo-variable second selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a diagram schematically showing the pseudo-variable second selection table 222f. The pseudo-variation second selection table 222f is a selection table for determining the number of fluctuation seconds of the pseudo-variation (the number of fluctuation seconds for each of the number of pseudo-variations selected by the pseudo-variation selection table 222e). In this pseudo-variable second selection table 222f, a plurality of pseudo-variable seconds are set for the reach type. For the normal reach and the super reach, 5000 ms, 7000 ms, 10000 ms, and 12000 ms are set in common, and the determination value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to each pseudo-variable second. Further, 5000 ms, 7000 ms, 10000 ms, 12000 ms, and 16000 ms are set for the special reach, respectively, and a determination value is assigned to each pseudo-variable second.

Here, in the pseudo-variable seconds selection table 222f, even if the maximum number of pseudo-variable seconds set in each reach is selected and the longest pseudo-variable seconds is selected for all the times, it is special. It is set not to exceed the number of seconds of fluctuation of the symbol.

The pseudo-variable number of seconds selection table 222f is a random counter 223t, which will be described later, in addition to the value of the staging counter 223f acquired in the process of S1523 of the normal staging selection process (FIGS. 116, S1520) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The value of is added, and based on the updated value, the number of pseudo-variable seconds corresponding to the number of pseudo-variations is selected from the process of S1524. Here, in the processing of S1523, when the value of the random counter 223t (any of 0 to 99) is added and the upper limit of the effect counter 223f is exceeded, 198 is subtracted from the added value. Updated with a value. For the specific enemy, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "190" and the value of the random counter 223t is "20", it is 190 + 20 = 210, which exceeds the upper limit "198". , 210-198 = 12, and the value of the effect counter 223f is updated to 12 and set. In addition, the number of pseudo-variation seconds is set for each number of pseudo-variations as much as the set number of pseudo-variations.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). FIG. 111B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 in the third embodiment has a pseudo-variation flag 223p, a pseudo-variation number storage area 223r, a pseudo-variation second storage area 223s, and a random counter 223t, respectively, added to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Since the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed for other configurations, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pseudo-variation flag 223p is a flag indicating that it is determined to execute the pseudo-variation. The pseudo-variation flag 223p is set to ON for the corresponding winning information, and is configured to be able to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo-variation at the start of the variation. This pseudo-variation flag 223p is set to ON when a lottery is drawn to execute the pseudo-variation by the processing of S1425 of the winning command processing (FIGS. 117, S1430) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag is on by the process of S1521 of the normal effect selection process (FIG. 116, S1520), it is automatically set to off.

The pseudo-variation number storage area 223r is a storage area for storing the pseudo-variation number. When the pseudo-variation number is selected from the pseudo-variation selection table 222e by the processing of S1423 of the winning command process (FIG. 117, S1430) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the selected number is stored.

The pseudo-variable seconds storage area 223s is a storage area in which the pseudo-variable seconds are stored for each number of times. For example, when four pseudo fluctuations are selected, the number of seconds of fluctuation of the pseudo fluctuations from the first day to the fourth is stored.

The random counter 223t is a counter for adding to the value of the effect counter 223f to make the value of the effect counter 223f a random value. Although not shown, the value counted by the electric random number circuit is stored in the random counter 223t.

<Regarding the control process in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. In the second embodiment, the command determination process (FIGS. 91, S1311) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 114, S1330) with respect to the first embodiment. It differs in that. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, so illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S1330). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 114, S1330), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 92, S1403) is the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 115, FIG. 115) with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 91, S1311) in the first embodiment. It differs from S1430) in that the processing of S1410 is changed to the winning command reception processing (FIGS. 117 and S1430). For other processes, the same process is executed.

After the process of S1402 is executed, the variation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1420). The fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1420) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1420). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1420), the processes S1508 to S1509 are deleted from the variation pattern selection process (S1403) in the first embodiment, and the normal effect selection process (FIGS. 116, S1520) is added. It differs in that it is. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the effect mode A is set, that is, the game state is other than the time effect period, the normal effect selection process is executed (S1520). The normal effect selection process (S1520) will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the contents of this normal effect selection process (S1520).

In the normal effect selection process (FIG. 116, S1520), first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation flag 223p is set to ON (S1521). When it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223p is set to off, that is, when it is determined that the variation is not determined to execute the pseudo-variation (S1521: No), the value of the variation mode selection counter 223h is set. It is acquired, and a variation pattern is selected and set from the corresponding sub-variation pattern selection table 222a (S1522). The advance notice effect is selected from the normal background advance notice selection table 222c based on the type of the normal background mode set in the normal background mode storage area 223o and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f (S1523). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1521, when it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223p is on, that is, when it is determined that the pseudo-variation is to be executed (S1521: Yes), the winning command reception process described later (S1521: Yes). In the process of S1425 in FIGS. 117 and S1430), the pseudo-variation number stored in the pseudo-variation number storage area 223r is read out (S1524).

It is determined whether the number of read pseudo fluctuations is 0 (S1525). When it is determined that the read pseudo-variation number is a value larger than 0 (S1525: No), 1 is subtracted from the read pseudo-variation number and updated (S1526). The value of the random counter 223r is added to the value of the effect counter 223f and updated. In this case, if the added value exceeds 198, which is the upper limit of the effect counter 223f, the value obtained by subtracting 198 from that value is set as the updated value.

Since the value of the random counter 223r is updated in the range of "0 to 99" at a high speed that is hundreds of times faster than the processing speed of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, every time the processing of S1527 is performed. The value of the random counter 223r acquired in can be updated to a different value. Therefore, the value of the effect counter 223f can be changed, and a different fluctuation time can be selected for each pseudo-variation number. Therefore, the pseudo fluctuation can be performed for each number of times with a random fluctuation time.

After the processing of S1527 is executed, the pseudo-variable seconds are selected from the pseudo-variable seconds selection table 222f based on the value of the effect counter 223f updated in the processing of S1527, and the pseudo-variable seconds storage area 233t is simulated. The number of pseudo-variable seconds is set corresponding to the number of fluctuations (how many pseudo-variations within 1 variation) (S1528). The rotating accessory movable data scenario corresponding to the set pseudo-variation seconds is set corresponding to the set pseudo-variation (S1529).

Here, operation data for stopping the rotating accessory 300 at a position corresponding to the number of pseudo-variation times is set corresponding to the determined pseudo-variation number of seconds. Specifically, it is the second pseudo-variation, and when 7000 ms is set as the pseudo-variation seconds, the third symbol is after rotating the rotating member 300 at high speed during the pseudo-variation of 7,000 ms. In synchronization with the timing at which the middle symbol (the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the end) is temporarily stopped, the drive data for displaying the stop display with the position indicated by "2" of the rotating accessory 300 directly above is displayed. Set. In the present embodiment, in order to synchronize the stop timing, the rotation start position of the rotating member 300 (which position (which number or diamond symbol is stopped directly above) and the stop position when the rotation is started) and the stop position. And the data of the timing to start the rotation of the rotating member 300 is set corresponding to the pseudo fluctuation time.

Therefore, the rotating member 300 starts rotating with a delay of a set time after the timing at which the rotation starts starts to change the third symbol. In S1529, this delay time is set.

After that, the process returns to the process of S1521, determines whether the number of pseudo fluctuations updated in S1526 is 0, and repeats the processes of S1526 to S1529 until it is determined to be 0. As a result, for all the set pseudo-variation times, the pseudo-variation seconds and the operation data of the rotating member 300 according to the pseudo-variation seconds are set. If it is determined that the number of pseudo fluctuations is 0 (S1525: Yes), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, it is executed when it is determined that the winning command is received in the process of S1409 in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 114, S1330) in the second embodiment (S1409: Yes). The winning command reception process (S1430) to be performed will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command reception process (S1430).

In the prize command reception process (FIG. 117, S1430), first, is the received prize command a prize command indicating that a prize has been selected in which the variation pattern of the reach type (normal reach, super reach, special reach) is selected? Determine (S1421). When it is determined that the received winning command is a winning command indicating the reach type (S1421: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1422). Based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, the winning / failing determination result indicated by the received winning command, and the reach type, the pseudo-variation lottery is executed from the pseudo-variation selection table 222e (S1423). Here, when the effect counter 223f in which the pseudo-variation number is set is acquired, the corresponding pseudo-variation number is stored in the pseudo-variation number storage area 223r.

It is determined whether the lottery result of S1424 has a pseudo-variation, that is, whether the pseudo-variation number is set in the pseudo-variation number storage area 223r (S1424). If it is determined that there is no pseudo fluctuation (S1424: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a pseudo-variation (S1424: Yes), the pseudo-variation flag 223p corresponding to the corresponding winning information storage area 223a is set to ON (S1425). After that, this process ends.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 128. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has a big hit fluctuation, the battle effect is performed by using the big hit change and the subsequent effect during the big hit game. The difference is that the configuration is displayed on the display device 81 and the configuration in which the effect of repeatedly striking the frame button 22 while the special symbol is changed is selected. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the battle effect in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120. The battle effect in the third embodiment is a character (hero and enemy) with a variation mode of a special symbol whose hit / fail determination result is a jackpot and a jackpot game display displayed during the jackpot gaming machine period executed after the variation mode. The battle is displayed, and the type of jackpot drawn based on the result of the victory or defeat is notified.

FIG. 118 is a time chart showing the configuration of the variation time of the battle effect display mode in the third embodiment. FIG. 118 shows an example in which the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol is a hit, and it is confirmed that the jackpot game is executed after the variable display of the special symbol. Here, the fluctuation time of the special symbol that becomes a big hit is set as the first half period of the battle production. In this first half period, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), the main character and the enemy face each other on the third symbol display device 81, and an effect of which one attacks first is displayed. In this case, the third symbol is reduced to the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing. After that, the reduced third symbol is displayed in a combination of doublets indicating a big hit. In the third embodiment, the jackpot type is not notified depending on the type of the number of the third symbol. With this configuration, when a jackpot is hit, the player cannot determine whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so the jackpot A or jackpot A depends on the outcome of the battle production. It is configured to notify whether it is B or not. If the hero wins, it is a jackpot A, and if the enemy wins, it is a jackpot B, so that the player can recognize it.

In the jackpot game period shown in FIG. 118, the display mode of the latter half of the battle effect as shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed. In the latter half of the battle production, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), an example in which the main character obtains the attack right and attacks is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 120, the enemy obtains the attack right and attacks. An example in which the display mode to be started is displayed is set.

As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the example in which the hero attacks, if the hero can attack and defeat the enemy, the type of jackpot is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot). If you can defeat it, you will be promoted to a certain degree! ”Is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 120, in the example where the enemy attacks, if the hero is attacked by the enemy and the hero is not defeated by preventing the attack from the enemy, the type of jackpot is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot). The text "If you can prevent the attack, you will be promoted to a certain degree!" Is displayed.

In this way, the player is configured to be informed that it is a jackpot A regardless of whether the main character or the enemy obtains the attack right, so that the player has a high probability of the gaming state after the jackpot game ( You can play the game with the expectation that it will be set to (probability change).

Here, when the gaming state is set to the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is maintained until the next big hit, so that the player is given a big hit. Becomes a matter of course. The player's interest is directed to whether the next jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or jackpot B (16R normal jackpot). As a player, by determining the jackpot A, the player is playing the game with the expectation that the high-probability gaming state (probability change) will be continuously granted even after the next jackpot.

In the present embodiment, when a high-probability gaming state is given, the fluctuation period of the special symbol in which the winning / failing judgment result is a jackpot and the time of the jackpot game executed after that are combined into one effect (battle). As the effect), the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display whether it is the jackpot A or the jackpot B, so that the time spent for the effect can be set longer, and the content of the effect is more diverse. Can be.

Further, in the conventional configuration, the jackpot is notified during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, and then the jackpot A or the jackpot B is notified during the jackpot game. In this configuration, when the player is in the probabilistic gaming state, the player is less interested in the notification of the jackpot in the fluctuation of the special symbol, so that the interest is reduced and the fluctuation period of the special symbol becomes boring. There was a problem. However, in the present embodiment, the player can perform the notification effect (battle effect) of whether the special symbol is the jackpot A or the jackpot B by combining the fluctuation period of the special symbol and the period of the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the trouble of getting bored.

Next, the button effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (b). The button effect is a kind of variation pattern of the special symbol, and is an effect in which the effect display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by pressing the frame button 22. As shown in FIG. 121 (a), a display mode for urging the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 is displayed during the variable display of the third symbol. Then, a remaining time indicator M indicating the remaining time during which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed below the symbol that imitates the shape of the frame button 22. The display color of the remaining time indicator M is configured to be variable based on the decrease in the remaining time. In the present embodiment, the period of the remaining time is set as the red display color, and when the remaining time decreases, the remaining time is variably displayed in white (the part displayed in red is reduced). See FIG. 121 (b)).

In addition, on the left side of the remaining time indicator M, by pressing and holding the frame button 22, it is automatically controlled (determined) to the same state as the continuous hitting, and it is set to "automatic continuous hitting by long pressing". The characters are displayed. An indicator whose color changes based on the repeated striking of the frame button 22 is displayed at the upper part of the display area. A scale is displayed on this indicator, and the scale is set to the degree of expectation that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the changing special symbol is a hit. When the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit and the color is changed (variable from white to red) up to the place where the scale of the indicator is larger, the player does not win the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is changing. You can expect it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed and held (pressing the frame button 22 continuously for 3 seconds or 1 second), the long press is detected on the symbol imitating the frame button 22. Then, the character "automatic continuous hitting" is displayed indicating that the state of repeated hitting is automatically set. In the present embodiment, the pressing period of the frame button 22 determined to be long-pressed is variably set according to the remaining time in which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Specifically, when the remaining time is 5 seconds or less, the setting determined to be a long press when the frame button 22 has been pressed continuously for 3 seconds is changed to the frame button 22 continuously for 1 second. When is pressed, it is switched and set so that it is determined to be a long press. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is pressed and held after the remaining time is running low, more indicators can be stored and the button effect can be enjoyed.

In this embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time is changed depending on the remaining time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of variable indicator is increased or the speed of variable is increased quickly. You may try to do it. Further, when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds or less) and the frame button 22 is operated, the maximum value at which the indicator is variable or a predetermined value (for example, scale MAX) is used. If the effect to be displayed up to is selected, the indicator may be variably displayed up to the scale 1).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 123. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment from the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223. It differs in that it is done. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the ROM 222 in the third embodiment, a fusion effect selection table 222g and a fusion variation pattern selection table 222h are added to the ROM 222 in the first embodiment, respectively. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fusion effect selection table 222g is a selection table for selecting the round display mode during the jackpot. FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fusion effect selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), a plurality of round display modes are set corresponding to the jackpot types. In the case of jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), the round display mode set in the display mode in which the hero finally wins is set, and in the case of jackpot B (16R normal jackpot), the hero is final. The round display mode set in the display mode that is defeated by is set.

Further, in the fusion effect selection table 222f, a round display mode is set corresponding to a variation pattern of a special symbol for notifying the jackpot executed before the jackpot game is started. As a result, it is possible to select a round display mode corresponding to the variation content of the special symbol, so that it is configured so that the effect can be matched. A plurality of round display modes are set for the content of the fluctuation pattern of each pre-variation, and the value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to each of them. Specifically, it will be described when explaining the fusion variation pattern selection table 222g for selecting the variation pattern of the battle effect (fusion effect) of the special symbol described later.

The fusion variation pattern selection table 222g is a selection table for selecting a variation pattern of a battle effect of a special symbol. FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fusion variation pattern selection table 222g. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect is set to be selected when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a big hit. The fluctuation pattern of the battle effect is set according to the jackpot type. Then, a determination value of the variation mode selection counter 223h is assigned to each battle effect.

Specifically, the enemy attack start fluctuation patterns A and B are battle effects in which the enemy launches an attack. The enemy attack start fluctuation patterns A and B correspond to the type of normal reach, and are selected when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the normal reach is output from the main control device 110. The hero attack start fluctuation patterns A and B are battle effects in which the hero launches an attack. The main character attack start fluctuation patterns A and B are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the types of super reach, and are selected when a fluctuation pattern command indicating super reach is received from the main control device 110. Simultaneous attack start fluctuation patterns A and B are battle effects in which the main character and the enemy attack at the same time. The simultaneous attack start variation patterns A and B are variation patterns corresponding to the types of special reach, and are variation patterns selected when a variation pattern command indicating special reach is received from the main control device 110.

Further, in the present embodiment, based on the type of the variation pattern selected from the fusion variation pattern selection table 222g, the round display mode during the jackpot is selected from the fusion effect selection table 222f described above. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), when either of the enemy attack start fluctuation patterns A and B is selected and the jackpot type is jackpot A, a reversal effect is produced based on the value of the effect counter 223f. Either A or B is selected. In this round production, a round production in which the main character wins by enduring the enemy's attack is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot B, either the enemy victory effect A or B is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. In the enemy victory effects A and B, a round effect in which the main character wins the enemy is displayed.

When either of the main character attack start fluctuation patterns A and B is selected, if it is a jackpot A, either the normal victory effect A or B is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. In these normal victory effects A and B, a round effect is displayed in which the main character attacks and defeats the enemy as it is. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot B, either the main character losing effect A or B is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. In the hero defeating effects A and B, a round display mode indicating that the enemy could not be defeated even if the hero launched an attack is displayed.

When either of the simultaneous attack start fluctuation patterns A and B is selected, the effect counter 223f is displayed for either the main character attack victory effect A or the enemy attack reversal victory effect B if the jackpot A is used. Simultaneous attack start In the fluctuation patterns A and B, the main character and the enemy are attacking each other at the same time, so the main character attack victory production A and the enemy finally get the attack right and win. However, the enemy attack reversal victory effect B, in which the main character endures the attack and wins, is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot B, the enemy attack victory effect A or the main character attack reverse defeat effect B is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. In the enemy attack victory effect A, a round effect in which the enemy finally obtains the attack right and wins is displayed. In the hero attack reverse defeat production B, the hero finally gets the attack right, but a round production is displayed in which the enemy endures the attack and the hero loses.

In this way, since the story is selected so that the variable pattern of the special symbol and the round effect displayed after that are connected, the player can enjoy the variable pattern effect and the round effect as a series of effects. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the connection between the display mode by the variation pattern of the special symbol and the round effect is connected by displaying a black screen (screen is blacked out), but the connection is not limited to this, and an image dedicated to connection is used. It may be configured to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to display the variable display mode (variable pattern) of the special symbol and the display mode of the round effect in a connected display effect.

FIG. 122B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. The RAM 223 in the third embodiment has a fusion effect flag 223u, a SW effective time storage area 223v, and a SW pressing counter 223w added to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, respectively. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fusion effect flag 223u is a flag indicating that the variation pattern has been selected from the fusion variation pattern selection table 222g. By turning on this fusion effect flag 223u based on the fact that the variation pattern of the battle effect is selected from the fusion effect pattern selection table 222g, in the round display mode of the jackpot executed thereafter, the fusion effect selection table The process of selecting the round display mode from 222f is executed.

The SW effective time storage area 223v is a storage area in which when the frame button 22 is operated, the effective time for which the operation is determined to be valid is stored. In the SW effective time storage area 223v, the effective time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set based on the selection of the fluctuation pattern in which the SW effect shown in FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (b) is performed.

The SW pressing counter 223w determines the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed. Even when the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit, the SW pressing counter 223w is added and updated, so that it is also a counter that counts the period of repeated hits.

<Control processing in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 129. In the control process according to the third embodiment, the command determination process (FIGS. 91, S1311) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the command determination process 3 (FIG. 125, S1340) with respect to the first embodiment. has been changed. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot control process (S1004).

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 124, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the jackpot start (S1101). When it is determined that it is the timing of the start of the big hit (S1101: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the big hit by the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1102). If it is determined that it is not the timing to start the big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the jackpot (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S1103). If it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round (S1104). When it is determined that it is the timing to start a new round (S1104: Yes), a process of opening either the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S1105). Set the number of rounds command to indicate the number of new rounds to start. In this embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened when a big hit is made in a normal gaming state, and the second variable winning device 650 is opened when a big hit is made in a high probability gaming state. Will be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), the condition for closing the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 that is open (10 balls or 30 seconds). Has passed) is determined (S1107). When it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied, the process of closing the open first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S1108). On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (S1107: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the command determination process 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S1340). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 125, S1340) in the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 92, S1403) is the variation pattern selection process with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 91, S1311) in the first embodiment. It has been changed to 3 (S1440), and each process from S1412 to S1413 has been added. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation pattern selection process 3 (S1440), the processes of S1508 to S1509 of the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 92 and S1403) in the first embodiment are changed to the normal staging selection process 2 (FIGS. 126 and S1530). It differs from the first embodiment. Since the same processing is executed for other processing, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the normal staging selection process 2 (S1530), which is the process in the variation pattern selection process 3 (S1440) in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal effect selection process 2 (S1530). This normal effect selection process 2 (S1530) is executed when it is determined in the process of S1507 (see FIG. 92) that the effect mode A is set (other than the time effect period) (S1507: Yes). It is a process.

In the normal effect selection process 2 (FIG. 126, S1530), first, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1531). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is incorrect (S1531: No), the value of the variation mode selection counter 223h is acquired, and the corresponding variation pattern is set to the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a (see FIG. 71) dedicated to the normal background. ) (S1532). Based on the selected normal background mode type and the value of the effect counter 223f, the advance notice effect is selected and set from the normal background advance notice selection table 222c (see FIG. 74 (a)) (S1533). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1531, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1531: Yes), the value of the variation mode selection counter 223h is acquired, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value is selected by fusion variation pattern. Select from the table 222g (see FIG. 123 (b)) (S1534). The fusion effect flag 223u is set to ON (S1535). After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the battle effect, in which the winning / failing determination result is a big hit, is selected. As a result, the player can determine that the jackpot has been achieved by starting the battle effect. Then, since the jackpot type is notified according to the content of the battle effect, the game can be concentrated on the notification of the jackpot type.

Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. In the process of S1409, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1409: No), it is determined whether or not the command of the jackpot game has been received (S1412). Here, the command of the jackpot game corresponds to the opening command and the round number command. When it is determined that the command of the jackpot game is received (S1412: Yes), the jackpot effect processing is executed (S1413). This jackpot effect processing (S1413) will be described with reference to FIG. 127.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect processing (S1413). Settings such as the round display mode to be displayed during this jackpot are executed.

In the jackpot effect processing (FIG. 127, S1413), first, it is determined whether or not the fusion effect flag 223u is on (S1541). When the fusion effect flag 223u is off, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect is selected and is not a big hit (S1541: No), the round display mode is displayed based on the received command. A display command for instructing is set (S1542).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fusion effect flag 223u is on (S1541: Yes), the fusion effect process is executed (S1544). This fusion effect processing (S1544) will be described with reference to FIG. 128.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the fusion jackpot effect processing (S1544). In the jackpot effect processing (FIG. 128, S1544), first, it is determined whether the received command is an opening command (S1551). If it is determined that the received command is the opening command, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1552). Based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f and the jackpot type, the round display mode (battle effect) is selected from the fusion effect selection table 222f (FIG. 123 (a)) (S1553).

The round display mode at the time of opening set to the selected round display mode is set, and the corresponding display command is set (S1554). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not the opening command (S1551: No), the received command is a round number command, so the number of rounds indicated by the round number command corresponds to the selected round display mode. The round display mode is set, and the corresponding display command is set (S1556). After that, this process ends. In this way, since the display modes corresponding to the rounds are displayed in order, the display can be performed according to the progress of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), which is one processing in the main processing (FIG. 90) of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 129, S1307), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is a value larger than 0. If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0, the value of the SW effective time storage area 223v is reset (S1732). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S1731: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted by the elapsed time and updated (S1733). It is determined whether the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S1734). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S1734: Yes), the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S1735). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 5 seconds or less (S1734: No), the long press determination value is set to 3 seconds (S1736).

In the process of S1737, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1737). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1737: Yes), the value of the SW pressing counter 223w is incremented by 1. It is determined whether the value of the SW press counter 223w is equal to or greater than the long press determination value set in the process of S1735 or S1736 (S1740). When it is determined that the value is equal to or longer than the long press determination value (S1740: Yes), the SW indicator is incremented by 1 within the range of the effect value set in the fluctuation pattern (S1741). A display command for displaying the updated SW indicator is set (S1742). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1740 that the SW press counter 223w is equal to or less than the long press determination value (S1740: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1737 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1737: No), the period during which the frame button 22 is not pressed is a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment). It is determined whether it is the above (S1743). If it is determined that the time is longer than the predetermined time (S1743: Yes), the SW pressing counter is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1739). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is less than the predetermined time (S1743: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the frame button 22 is pressed within 0.5 seconds, it is assumed that the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit, and the value of the SW pressing counter 223w is incremented by 1 and updated. Then, when the value exceeds the long press determination value, the SW indicator is set to be variable. The variable amount of the SW indicator is preset for each fluctuation pattern, and is set to represent the degree of expectation of the hit / fail determination result.

Therefore, the player can change the indicator regardless of whether the player presses the button for a long time or hits the button repeatedly. Further, since the long press determination value is variably set according to the SW effective time, the player can be shown the effect of changing the indicator even when the SW effective time is short. It should be noted that the speed at which the indicator is varied may be set to be faster depending on the value of the SW effective time.

In the present embodiment, the first half of the battle effect is displayed in the jackpot fluctuation, and the second half of the battle effect is displayed in the subsequent jackpot game. With this configuration, even if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, the production time of the battle effect can be set sufficiently, and the player can be provided with a time-efficient game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved performance.

In this embodiment, in the first half of the battle production that is executed by the jackpot fluctuation, the production of which of the main character and the enemy can take the attack right is executed, and in the subsequent jackpot production, the main character attacks. In that case, if the enemy can be defeated, it indicates that the type of jackpot is jackpot A (probability variation), and if it cannot be defeated, it is configured to notify that it is jackpot B (normal jackpot). Further, when the enemy attacks, if the attack from the enemy can be prevented, the jackpot A is notified, and if the attack cannot be prevented, the jackpot B is notified.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol (battle effect) and the round display mode of the jackpot game are selected respectively, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation of the special symbol is based on the result of the jackpot hit / fail judgment. When selecting a pattern, the effect time including the time of the jackpot game to be executed after that may be calculated, and the battle effect corresponding to the effect time may be selected. With this configuration, the number of times the battle effect is selected can be reduced, and control can be easily performed.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 133. The present embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the battle effect described in the third embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the damage given to the enemy is changed according to the history of the technique in which the main character attacks the enemy.

In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of types of enemies are set, and the main character can attack and defeat the enemy (headbutt, attack with a sword, etc.) and the defeated enemy. Is stored as a history. When the same enemy is subjected to a technique that remains in the history, the damage to the enemy is increased. Therefore, the player can feel that the hero grows up, and even if the technique once performed is selected again, he can enjoy it without getting bored.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to memorize the history of the technique, but the attack location is not limited to that, and the attack location (enemy's head, torso, foot, etc.) is memorized and the attack location is memorized in the history. May be configured to be a weak point of the enemy. With this configuration, even if the number of productions is not large and the same production is selected, the player can enjoy the production without getting tired.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 131, the battle effect displayed during the change of the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment and during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 130A shows a display mode of a battle effect displayed as an effect display mode (variation pattern) when the variation display of the special symbol (third symbol) is executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is a figure which showed an example. In the present embodiment, the player is notified that the player is a big hit by displaying the display mode in which he / she was able to meet the enemy. In this case, the reduced and displayed third symbol is stopped and displayed in doublets indicating that it is a big hit.

In the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the history of the enemies defeated in battle and the technique defeated at that time are displayed side by side in the battle effect so far. As a result, the player can recognize that the enemy has been defeated once when the battle effect of fighting the same enemy is displayed next time. In addition, the number of defeated enemies can be recognized.

Further, in the present embodiment, when an enemy is defeated, the technique of defeating the enemy is set as the weak point of the enemy from the next time. In terms of control, when the weak point technique is selected and displayed, the indicator indicated by the life point (HP) indicating the remaining physical strength of the enemy is set to be reduced twice as much as usual. As a result, even if the battle effect is displayed and the enemy who fought once is selected and displayed, the player can play the game with the expectation that the main character will perform the technique that is the weak point of the enemy. You can suppress the trouble of getting bored by being an enemy. Therefore, even if the number of enemies is set small, the same enemies can be reused.

FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the main character defeats an enemy horn beast by an attack using a sword during a jackpot game. In this embodiment, by displaying the effect that the main character wins against the enemy during the jackpot round, it is configured to notify that the jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot). Also, in the area where the history is displayed in the upper left of the display area, the "horn beast" indicating the type of enemy is displayed, and the character "sword" indicating the type of defeated technique is displayed below it. There is.

Further, FIG. 131 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the main character defeats the horned beast with a head butt. In this case, the "horn beast" indicating the type of enemy is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and the "headbutt" indicating the defeated technique is displayed below it. Further, FIG. 130 (c) is a diagram showing a display mode when the main character defeats an enemy horn beast by a kick. Also in this case, in the upper left of the display area, the character "kick" indicating the type of the defeated technique is displayed under the "horn beast" which is the type of the defeated enemy. Since the current history is displayed in addition to the previous history as in the display mode shown in FIGS. 130 (b) to 131 (b), the player can easily recognize the past history.

In this embodiment, the type of enemy, the type of technique to be displayed, etc. are predetermined (set by the fluctuation pattern) according to the type of fluctuation pattern selected, but the configuration is not limited to this. , The type of the enemy may be selected by the player operating the frame button 22, or the type of the technique may be selected from the list when attacking. By configuring in this way, the player recognizes that the enemy once defeated is an enemy that is easy to defeat, and selects the same enemy again to play, or plays with the goal of defeating all enemies. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game at an early stage. In addition, when the technique can be selected, the game can be played with the expectation that the technique that is the weak point of the opponent is included, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the configuration where the technique can be selected, when the hit / fail judgment result is probable, the player can be given a probable change by configuring the technique to include the technique that is the weak point of the enemy more easily in the list than when it is not probable. You can play the game in connection with your expectations.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 132 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment. In the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment, the contents of the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal background mode are changed with respect to the ROM 222 in the first embodiment, and the jackpot effect selection table 222h is added.

In the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal background mode in the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is the display mode of the battle effect as shown in FIG. 130 (a). has been changed. Here, if the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, the special symbols are aligned and the display mode in which the enemy is encountered is displayed. By meeting the enemy, the player can recognize that it is a big hit and can determine that the battle production is started.

The jackpot effect selection table 222h is a selection table for selecting a battle effect to be displayed in each round effect in the jackpot game. Here, various display modes of battle effects as shown in FIGS. 130 (b) to 131 (b) are set to be selected based on the current number of rounds, the effect counter, and the jackpot type. .. When the jackpot type is jackpot A, as shown in FIGS. 130 (b) to 131 (b), the effect in which the main character wins is finally selected. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, the illustration is omitted, but the effect that the hero loses to the enemy is set to be finally selected. That is, all the battle effects selected when the number of rounds in which the victory or defeat is determined (15th R in the present embodiment) are started are set to the battle effect mode in which the victory or defeat is determined. When the life point of the enemy becomes 0 due to the battle production, if the jackpot A is decided in that round, the display mode in which the main character wins is set, and if it is the jackpot B, the enemy escapes. The display mode is set to be displayed. Also, in the round before the 15th round, if the hero's life point becomes 0, and if the determined jackpot type is jackpot A, the hero will be revived and the life point will increase to the maximum value. The effect display mode is displayed, and in the case of the jackpot B, the display mode in which the main character is defeated is displayed.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment has a history storage area 223x and a life point storage area 223y added to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, respectively. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment.

The history storage area 223x is a storage area in which information on the defeated enemy and information on the technique of defeating the enemy are stored in order corresponding to each other in the battle production. This history storage area 223x is initialized when the power is turned off, and is reset to the initial value (state where there is no history).

The life point storage area 223y is a storage area for storing values corresponding to the life points of the main character and the enemy. The life points of the main character are set in advance at the start of the battle. Also, the life points of the enemy are set to unique values based on the type of enemy at the start of the battle.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth embodiment>
The control process in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 133. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the command determination process (FIG. 91, S1311) is changed to the command determination process 4 (not shown). Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Without the command determination process 4 (not shown) in the fourth embodiment, the command determination process 3 (FIG. 125, S1340) in the third embodiment is compared with the command determination process (FIG. 91, S1311) in the first embodiment. The first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the process of S1412 and the process of changing the jackpot effect process (S1413) to the jackpot effect process 2 (FIGS. 133 and S1460) are added. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, regarding the jackpot effect processing 2 (S1460), which is one of the processing in the command determination processing 4 (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. explain. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect processing 2 (S1460).

In the jackpot effect processing 2 (FIG. 133, S1460), first, it is determined whether the received command is an opening command (S1561). When it is determined that the received command is the opening command (S1561: Yes), the effect history is read from the history storage area 223x and the weak point of the enemy is set (S1562). The value of the effect counter 223f is acquired, and the jackpot effect pattern (display mode of the battle effect) is determined based on the number of rounds from the jackpot effect selection table 222h, the acquired effect counter value, and the determined jackpot type. (S1563). A display command corresponding to the jackpot effect pattern determined in the process of S1563 and the effect history read in S1562 is set (S1564).

In this way, when the opening command at the start of the big hit is received, the history of the battle effect so far is read out, and the history is notified to the display control device 113 by the command. Therefore, the display control device 113 can discriminate the history information and display the display mode for notifying the history to the third symbol display device 81. After that, this process ends. In addition, when the opening command is received, the battle effect corresponding to the start is selected from the jackpot effect selection table 222h as the 1R round effect, so that the story is as the round progresses. It is possible to perform a certain battle production. Here, the story-like battle production is, for example, in the 1st round, both sides are glaring at each other and which one launches the attack, and in the 2nd to 4th rounds, the attack of the first attacker is directed. At the 5th to 7th rounds, an effect is performed as to whether the attacked opponent can withstand the attack. In the meantime, when the life point of the enemy becomes 0, the display mode in which the main character wins is displayed if the jackpot is A, and the display mode in which the enemy escapes is displayed if the jackpot is B. Then, the battle production ends. Then, as the effect of the jackpot round, a normal round effect in which a character or the like is displayed is executed. In this way, the flow of the battle production is set for each round, and the production that the victory or defeat is decided at the 15th round is always set, so that the player can decide whether the hero can win or not. You can see it while having fun. Also, when the type of jackpot is jackpot A, it is easier to select the effect that the main character launches an attack, or the effect that withstands the attack from the enemy (life points do not decrease) is selected than when it is jackpot B. It is configured to be easy. As a result, the player can predict whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A by the production in the middle of the jackpot game 15R, and can enjoy the jackpot game more.

On the other hand, in the process of S1561 when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot command (S1561: No), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired, and based on the acquired value, the jackpot type, and the number of rounds, The battle effect to be displayed in the next round is selected (determined) from the jackpot effect selection table 222h (S1565).

It is determined whether the selected effect content is an attack set as a weak point of the enemy in the process of S1562 (S1566). If it is determined that the attack is set to the weak point of the enemy (S1566: Yes), the life point of the enemy is subtracted by twice the normal amount based on the determined production content, and the life point storage area 223y (S1567). On the other hand, in the process of S1566, if it is determined that the selected effect content is not an attack on the weak point of the enemy, the life point of the enemy is set to be subtracted by 1 times the normal value based on the determined effect content. (S1568). Here, when the enemy is attacked, the life point is subtracted and set in the life point storage area 223y, but when the enemy attacks the hero, the hero's life point is subtracted. Will be done.

It is determined whether the life point of the enemy is a value larger than 0 (S1569). When it is determined that the life point of the enemy is 0 or less (S1569: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (S1570). When it is determined that the determined jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (S1570: Yes), a display command indicating the winning effect content is set (S1571). When this command is received by the display control device 113, a display command indicating the content of the winning effect as shown in FIGS. 130 (b) to 131 (b) is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1571). The technique of defeating the enemy is set as the weak point of the enemy, and is stored in the history storage area 223x corresponding to the winning enemy (S1572). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1570, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (16R normal jackpot) (S1570: No), a display command indicating the display mode in which the enemy has escaped is set (S1573). When the display mode in which the enemy has escaped is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is jackpot B.

On the other hand, in the process of S1569, when it is determined that the life point of the enemy is a value larger than 0 (S1569: Yes), it is determined whether the life point of the main character is a value larger than 0 (S1574). When it is determined that the life point of the hero is a value of 0 or less (S1574: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A (S1575). When it is determined that the jackpot type is probable (S1575: Yes), a display command indicating the effect content in which the player is revived and becomes energetic is set (S1576). Here, the life point of the main character is also updated to the maximum value and set in the life point storage area 223y.

On the other hand, in the process of S1575, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (S1575: No), a display command instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode indicating the defeat of the hero. Is set (S1577). Further, in the process of S1574, if it is determined that the life point of the main character is a value larger than 0 (S1574: Yes), this process is terminated.

In this way, the player increases or decreases the life point by the effect determined for each round, and when the life point becomes 0, the player switches and displays the effect based on the determined jackpot type. Then, the player can feel as if the jackpot type is determined by the result of the battle.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 135. FIG. 134 (a) shows a state before the combined operation unit operates. On the third symbol display device 81, four diagonal and central lines are displayed in a reach state. Here, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), the composite operation unit rotates toward the display area side of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol (4 symbols) displayed on the left, right, top, and bottom, respectively. , 2 symbols) are variable to cover.

After that, as shown in FIG. 135, when the combined operation unit is changed to a position that does not hide the left, right, top, and bottom symbols, the symbols are changed from normal symbols (4 symbols, 2 symbols) to probabilistic symbols (1 symbol, 7 symbols), respectively. Is displayed. In this way, when the combined operation unit operates, the type of the third symbol is changed to a symbol that is advantageous to the player, so that the player plays the game with the expectation that the combined operation unit will operate. Can be done.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine fused with the slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

In the present embodiment, the control device is divided into the main control device, the voice lamp control device, the display control device, and the like, but the control device may be collectively configured as one control device.

In addition, a part or all of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined and configured.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

The moving member formed so as to be movable between the first position and the second position, the driving means for generating the driving force for moving the moving member, and the driving force generated by the driving means are the moving member. In a gaming machine provided with a transmission means for transmitting to, the transmission means transmits a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the moving member and a transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member. It is possible to form a blocking state that shuts off, and when at least the moving member at the first position starts moving to the second position, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the moving member in the first position starts to move to the second position, the transmitting state is formed after the blocking state is formed by the transmitting means, so that the moving member The driving force required for the driving means to start the movement can be suppressed, and as a result, the driving means can be miniaturized.

That is, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the stationary object is moved, so that the force exceeding the inertial force generated in the moving member at the start of movement is applied. It is necessary to act on such a moving member, and the driving force required for the driving means becomes large. As a result, the size of the driving means has been increased (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640). On the other hand, after the movement of the moving member is started, the action of inertia that tries to maintain the moving state of the moving member acts, so that the driving force required for the driving means causes the moving member to move. It is smaller than the driving force required to get started. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it can be said that a driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is being used.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the moving member in the first position starts to move to the second position, the transmission state is formed after the cutoff state is formed by the transmission means, so that the pachinko machine A1 is driven. Even if the driving force that can be generated by the means is small, the moving member can be started to move. That is, by forming the cutoff state first by the transmission means, it is possible to generate a driving force in the driving means in a no-load state, and it is possible to give momentum (inertial force) to the driving state of the driving means. .. After that, the transmission state is formed by the transmission means (switched from the cutoff state to the transmission state), so that the driving means has a driving force to the moving means in a state where the driving state has momentum (a state where the inertial force is large). Can be transmitted. Thereby, even if the drive means is miniaturized, the movement of the moving member can be started. In other words, it is possible to suppress the state in which a drive means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used after the movement of the moving member is started.

In the gaming machine A1, the transmission means is formed so as to be able to mesh with a drive means side member in which teeth to which driving force is transmitted from the drive means are formed at least partially or all around, and a drive means side member thereof. A moving member side member having teeth formed at least partially or all around the teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the driving means side member to the moving member, and at least the driving means side member or the moving member side member. One is a gaming machine A2 comprising a non-forming portion in which the teeth are non-formed and cannot be meshed with the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member.

According to the gaming machine A2, in the transmission means, the drive means side member and the moving member side member are formed so as to be meshable with each other. Therefore, when the drive means side member is rotated by the drive force of the drive means, the drive means side member thereof is formed. The moving member side member meshed with the member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the moving member (a transmission state is formed) through the rotation of the moving member side member. In this case, since a non-formed portion in which the teeth are not formed is formed on one of the drive means side member and the moving member side member, the drive means side member is rotated by the drive force of the drive means, and the drive means side is When the non-forming portion is arranged at the meshing position of the member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member cannot be meshed with each other, and the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is blocked. (A cutoff state is formed).

Therefore, when the moving member in the first position starts to move to the second position, the drive means side member can be idled by first forming a blocking state by using the non-forming portion. Therefore, the driving means can be driven in a no-load state, and the driving state of the driving means can have momentum (inertial force in the member on the driving means side). After that, by engaging the idling drive means side member with the moving member side member (that is, forming a transmission state), the drive means starts driving the moving means with the driving state gaining momentum. be able to. Thereby, even if the drive means is miniaturized, the movement of the moving member can be started.

As described above, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the transmission means is composed of a driving means side member and a moving member side member, and is attached to at least one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. Since the non-formed portion where the teeth are non-formed is provided, the cut-off state and the transmission state are set according to the relative rotation position (rotation position of the non-formed portion) between the drive means side member and the moving member side member. And can be switched. That is, since the configuration for achieving the switching of such states does not require an actuator device and can be configured only with gears, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, the teeth formed on the drive means side member and the moving member side member are mechanical elements used for power transmission through the tooth engagement with the mating tooth. In this case, the shape of the tooth streak is not limited. For example, the teeth of the gear illustrated below can be applied to the teeth of the drive means side member and the moving member side member. Examples of the gear include spur gears, helical gears, bevel gears, bevel gears, bevel gears, screw gears, crown gears, miter gears, internal gears, hypoid gears, worm gears and the like. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions shown below.

In the gaming machine A2, each of the drive means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-formed portion, and the non-formed portion of the drive means side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member face each other. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a cutoff state is formed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is provided with a non-forming portion, and the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are not formed. Since the forming portions face each other to form a cutoff state, the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is increased. It can be improved.

That is, when only one of the drive means side member or the moving member side member has a non-formed portion (that is, teeth are formed on the other side of the drive means side member or the moving member side member over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction). It is necessary that the non-formed portion is retracted to a position where the tooth engagement with the other tooth of the drive means side member or the moving member side member can be avoided. Specifically, the non-forming portion needs to be retracted toward the rotation axis side from the valley bottom in one tooth of the drive means side member or the moving member side member. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-formed portion becomes large, so that the outer diameter in one of the non-formed portions of the drive means side member or the moving member side member becomes small, and one of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is correspondingly small. It causes a decrease in the rigidity of.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A3, since each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has a non-forming portion, both of these non-forming portions recede to a position where they do not interfere with the facing non-forming portion. It's enough if you have it. Specifically, both non-forming portions can be positioned between the valley bottom and the mountain peak in the teeth of the drive means side member and the moving member side member, and it is not necessary to retract the rotation shaft side from the valley bottom. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-formed portion can be reduced, so that the outer diameters of the non-formed portions of the drive means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the drive means side member and the moving member side member is increased. It can be improved.

In the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion in one of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is formed so as to be curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of one of the drive means side member or the moving member side member. The non-formed portion of the other side of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is separated from the other tooth of the drive means side member or the moving member side member in the circumferential direction, so that the drive means side member or the moving member side member A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it has a shape that projects toward a non-forming portion on one side.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion included in each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is a non-forming portion in one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. The non-formed portion of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on one rotation axis of the drive means side member or the moving member side member, and the non-forming portion on the other side of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is the drive means side member or the movement. A shape that projects toward a non-formed portion formed on one of the drive means side member or the moving member side member as the member side member is separated from the other tooth in the circumferential direction (that is, the drive means side member or the moving member side member). Since the shape is such that the distance from the other rotation axis is large), the drive means side member or the moving member side member can be formed while avoiding interference between these two non-forming portions and forming a cutoff state. The outer diameter of the other non-formed portion can be increased to further increase the rigidity of the other of the drive means side member or the moving member side member.

In the game machine A3 or A4, the drive means side member and the moving member side member are the drive means at each of the first phase position and the second phase position which is a phase position different from the first phase position. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the cutoff state is formed by the non-formed portion of the side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member facing each other.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3 or A4, the drive means side member and the moving member side member form a cutoff state at two positions, the first phase position and the second phase position. Therefore, by making the first phase position and the second phase position correspond to the first position and the second position of the moving member, the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started. When the movement of the moving member in the second position to the first position is started, the transmission state is formed after the cutoff state is formed, so that the driving state of the driving means is changed. It can have momentum (inertial force). That is, even if the driving force that can be generated by the driving means is small, the moving member can be started to move in both the case where the moving member is in the first position and the case where the moving member is in the second position.

A game including a movable member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving force to the moving member. In the machine, the moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmitting means has a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member, and the driving means from the driving means. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that a cutoff state in which transmission of a driving force to a first moving member is cut off can be formed at the same time.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member and the second moving member by the transmitting means, and the first moving member and the second moving member move. Will be done. In this case, the transmission means can simultaneously form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member and a blocking state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is cut off. Therefore, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the driving means of 1.

That is, when the first moving member and the second moving member are moved by one driving means, in the conventional product, there are two driving states, that is, a state in which the driving means generates a driving force and a state in which the driving force is stopped. Since the structure is such that the operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member are switched by forming the above, only the operation mode in which both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop together. Was formed, and it was not possible to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member. Therefore, in order to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member, a driving means for moving the first moving member and a driving means for moving the second moving member are individually provided. It was necessary (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-139766).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, as described above, since the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the driving means of 1, the first moving member and the second moving member can be achieved. It is possible to reduce the number of drive means and reduce the product cost while making it possible to exert the effect of moving and stopping the members.

In the game machine B1, the transmission means transmits the driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member and the driving force generated by the driving means to the second moving member. The first transmission member includes a second transmission member, and the first transmission member includes a first drive means side member in which teeth to which driving force is transmitted from the drive means are formed at least partially or all around, and a first drive means thereof. With the first moving member side member, which is formed in a toothed manner on the side member and has teeth formed on at least a part or the entire circumference of the first moving member to transmit the driving force transmitted from the first driving means side member to the first moving member. , And at least one of the first drive means side member or the first moving member side member has teeth not formed and cannot be meshed with the other of the first drive means side member or the first moving member side member. A gaming machine B2 comprising a non-forming portion to be formed.

According to the gaming machine B2, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member by the first transmission member and to the second moving member by the second transmission member. The first moving member and the second moving member are moved, respectively.

In this case, since the first drive means side member and the first moving member side member are formed in a meshable manner in the first transmission member, when the first drive means side member is rotated by the drive force of the drive means, the first drive means side member is rotated. The first moving member side member meshed with the first driving means side member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member through the rotation of the first moving member side member, and the first moving member Is moved. Further, since one of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member includes a non-forming portion in which the teeth are not formed, the first driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first driving means side member is rotated. When the non-forming portion is arranged at the meshing position of the 1 drive means side member and the 1st moving member side member, the 1st drive means side member and the 1st moving member side member are made incompatible with each other, and the drive means The transmission of the driving force to the first moving member is cut off (a cutoff state is formed). That is, the formation of the cutoff state by the first transmission member can be performed independently of the transmission of the driving force to the second moving member by the second transmission member. Thereby, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the driving means 1.

As described above, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the first transmission member is composed of a first driving means side member and a first moving member side member, and the first driving means side member or the first driving means side member thereof. Since the non-formed portion is provided on at least one of the first moving member side members with the teeth non-formed, the relative rotation position (of the non-formed portion) between the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member is provided. The cutoff state and the transmission state can be switched according to the rotation position). That is, since the configuration for achieving the switching of such states does not require an actuator device and can be configured only with gears, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B2, when the transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member is formed by the first transmitting member, the second transmitting member receives the driving force of the driving means from the driving means. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it is possible to form a cutoff state in which the transmission of a driving force to a moving member is cut off.

According to the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member is transferred from the driving means to the second moving member when the transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first moving member is formed by the first transmitting member. Since it is possible to form a cutoff state in which the transmission of the driving force of the above is cut off, the operation mode of stopping the second moving member while moving the first moving member can be achieved by the driving means of 1. That is, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 (that is, the effect that the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the driving means 1), while moving the first moving member. The operation mode for stopping the second moving member can be achieved by the driving means 1. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, and the variation of the movement and stop operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member can be increased to enhance the effect of the effect. can.

In the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member includes a groove-shaped groove portion and a pin portion movably formed along the groove portion, and the groove portion and the pin portion are from the driving means to the second moving member. The pin portion is arranged in the transmission path of the driving force of the above, and the pin portion is moved along the groove portion, so that a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member can be formed. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that by stopping the pin portion with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form a cutoff state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is cut off.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the pin portion is moved along the groove portion, so that it is possible to form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member. On the other hand, by stopping the pin portion with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form a cutoff state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is cut off, so that the driving force of the driving means is first moved. When the transmission state to be transmitted to the member is formed by the first transmission member (that is, the first moving member is being moved), the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked. , While stopping the second moving member, when the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is blocked by the first transmitting member (that is, the first moving member is stopped), the driving means The driving force of the above can be transmitted to the second moving member to move the second moving member.

In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member is a second drive means side member in which teeth to which driving force is transmitted from the drive means are formed at least partially or all around, and a second drive means side member thereof. Teeth that are meshably formed and transmit the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member are formed at least partially or all around, and one of the groove portion or the pin portion is arranged. The second moving member side member is provided, and the second driving means side member is arranged coaxially with the first driving means side member of the first transmission member, and the second moving member side member is provided. Is disposed coaxially with the first moving member side member of the first transmission member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the second driving means side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member are the first driving means side member and the first moving of the first transmission member. Since they are arranged coaxially with the member side members, backlash between the second drive means side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member, and the first drive means side member of the first transmission member and Backlash between the first moving member side members can be generated in the same direction, and thereby it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the effect timing between the first moving member and the second moving member.

In the gaming machine B5, the second drive means side member of the second transmission member may be fixed to the first drive means side member of the first transmission member. According to this, since the second drive means side member of the second transmission member is fixed to the first drive means side member of the first transmission member, it is attached to both the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member. A member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means is not required, and a member for transmitting to either the first driving means side member or the second driving means side member is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts or reduce the size of the parts to reduce the product cost.

Here, the fact that the first drive means side member is fixed to the second drive means side member means that it is sufficient if the rotations of the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member are synchronized. Therefore, the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member may be formed separately and fixed to each other, or may be integrally formed. When they are formed as separate bodies, as a method of fixing the two, for example, bonding with an adhesive, welding with ultrasonic waves, fastening with screws, and a method of fitting a protrusion provided on one side into a recess or a hole provided on the other side. , A method combining these is exemplified.

A game including a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving force to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means is formed so as to be meshable with a drive means side member in which teeth to which driving force is transmitted from the drive means are formed at least partially or all around, and the drive means side member thereof. The moving member side member is provided with a moving member side member in which teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the means side member to the moving member are formed at least partially or all around, and the driving means side member and the moving member side member are described above. Each of the non-formed portions having teeth that are non-formed and cannot be meshed with each other is provided, and when the non-formed portions are arranged at the meshing positions of the drive means side member and the moving member side member, the moving member side. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the non-formed portion of the member is formed so as to be abuttable against the non-formed portion of the drive means side member.

According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the moving member side member meshed with the driving means side member is rotated, and the moving member side member is rotated along with the rotation of the moving member side member. , The moving member is moved. When the drive means side member is further rotated by the drive force of the drive means and the non-forming portions are arranged at the meshing positions of the drive means side member and the moving member side member, the drive means side member and the moving member side member become Is considered to be incompatible. As a result, the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is cut off (a cutoff state is formed), and the moving member is stopped. That is, the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range. In this case, since the non-formed portion of the moving member side member is formed so as to be in contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member, the non-formed portion of the moving member side member is applied to the non-formed portion of the drive means side member. It is possible to regulate the rotation of the moving member side member in the contacting direction. That is, the movement of the moving member can be restricted.

In this case, the moving member has been stopped as follows in the past. That is, when a sensor device for detecting the rotation position of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is provided and the sensor device detects the rotation of the drive means side member or the moving member side member to a predetermined rotation position, It is determined that the moving member has reached the end of the moving range, and the driving of the driving means is stopped. Alternatively, when the drive amount of the drive means (for example, the number of steps when the drive means is configured by a step motor) is detected (counted) and the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the moving member ends the movement range. Is determined to have reached, and the driving of the driving means is stopped (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640). In this case, for example, the drive means may not be stopped even though the moving member has reached the end of the movement range due to a failure in detecting the rotation position or the drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the movement range of the moving member, and when the driving means is not properly stopped, the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper. However, in such a structure in which the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper, when the moving member collides with the stopper, not only the moving member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the driving means. It may act and cause damage to the drive means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the driving means side member and the moving member side member cannot be meshed with each other. Since the transmission of the driving force to the moving member is cut off, the moving member can be stopped even when the driving force of the driving means continues to be generated. Therefore, damage due to a collision between the moving member and another member can be avoided. Further, even if the moving member collides with another member, the moving member is separated from the driving means and the driving means is idling, so that an excessive load acts on the driving means. It can be avoided.

Further, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed movably and a driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member are provided, and the moving member is moved within a predetermined moving range by the driving force of the driving means. There is a gaming machine to be used (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640).
In this case, for example, when the end of the moving range of the moving member is set as the ascending position and gravity is applied to the moving member arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member moves (descends) due to the action of gravity. You need to avoid it. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the moving force of the driving means opposes gravity (weight of the moving member) to regulate the movement (descending) of the moving member (that is, the moving member is at the end of the moving range). Since it is a structure (to hold), the energy consumption required to hold the moving member is high.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member. This makes it possible to regulate the rotation of the moving member side member (movement of the moving member). That is, in the gaming machine C1, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member and the driving means are separated from each other, so that the moving member cannot be held at the end by using the driving force of the driving means. The moving member can be mechanically held at the end of the moving range by utilizing the contact of the non-forming portion. As a result, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C1, the non-formed portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are arranged at the toothing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and are in contact with each other. In this case, the gaming machine C2 is formed in a shape capable of restricting the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. And when they are in contact with each other (that is, when the moving means is placed at the end of the moving range), the moving member is formed in a shape that can regulate the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions. The moving member when the end of the moving range is reached, as compared to the case where the rotation of the side member is formed in a shape that can be regulated in only one direction (for example, only the direction in which the moving member is moved by the action of gravity). The vibration of the moving member can be converged, the moving member can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range, and the moving member can be held in a stable state at the end of the moving range. It is possible to suppress vibration and misalignment due to external force (external force generated by a person hitting or shaking the game board).

In the game machine C2, the non-formed portion of the drive means side member is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member, and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member is the drive. When arranged at the meshing position of the means side member and the moving member side member, it has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member and has the same diameter as the arc of the non-formed portion of the drive means side member. Alternatively, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a slightly large diameter.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the non-forming portion of the drive means side member is formed by being curved in an arc shape about the rotation axis of the drive means side member, and is formed on the moving member side. When the non-formed portion of the member is arranged at the toothing position of the drive means side member and the moving member side member, the non-formed portion has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member and the drive means side member is not formed. Since it is formed by being curved in an arc shape having the same diameter as or slightly larger than the arc of the portion, the non-formed portion of the moving member side member can be smoothly brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member. It is possible to easily bring them into contact with each other by surface contact. As a result, the non-formed portions can be brought into contact with each other smoothly, the impact when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range and is stopped can be relaxed, and the contact pressure between the non-formed portions can be reduced. , It is possible to improve the durability of the drive means side member and the moving member side member.

Further, since the non-formed portion of the drive means side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member are curved in a concentric arc shape, the moving member side member can be of the moving member side member regardless of the rotation position (phase) of the driving means side member. The non-formed portion can be brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member, and the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions can be regulated. That is, even if the drive side gear is further rotated after the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the rotation of the moving member side member can be restricted in both directions, and as a result, the moving member is held at the end of the moving range. can do.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the moving member side member includes a plurality of fastened portions, and the moving member is fastened and fixed to the transfer member side gear via the plurality of fastened portions. A gaming machine C4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C4, since the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side member via a plurality of fastened portions, one structure is formed by the moving member side member and the moving member connected at these multiple points. can. That is, the rigidity of the moving member side member can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the moving member. That is, since the moving member side member receives a reaction force from the drive means side member when the non-formed portion is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member, the rigidity for resisting the reaction force is ensured. On the other hand, for example, if the wall thickness is increased, the weight increases, and if a highly rigid material is used, the material cost increases. In order to increase the rigidity of the moving member side member (by being integrated with the member), it is not necessary to increase the wall thickness of the moving member side member or to use a highly rigid material. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the moving member side member while reducing the weight and cost of the moving member side member.

In the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is disposed at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means side member with the non-formed portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is arranged at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means side member with the non-formed portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. It is possible to effectively increase the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the drive means side member when the non-formed portion of the member side member is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both weight reduction and cost reduction of the moving member side member and improvement of durability of the moving member side member.

It is more preferable that the fastened portion of the moving member gear is arranged at a position facing the rotation axis of the driving means side member with the non-formed portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. The reaction force received by the moving member side member when the non-formed portion of the moving member side member is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the driving means side member is the rotation shaft of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member. Since the action is performed along the line connecting the drive means side members, the fastened portion is arranged at a position facing the rotation axis of the drive means side member, which has the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the drive means side member. This is because it can be further demonstrated.

In a gaming machine provided with a moving member rotatably formed about a first axis between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the moving member, the above-mentioned game machine. A rotating member that is rotated around a second axis by a driving force transmitted from the driving means, and a pin member that is arranged on the rotating member and is positioned eccentrically with respect to the second axis are provided, and the movement thereof is provided. The member includes a groove-shaped guide groove portion that guides the pin member along the inner wall surface, and the guide groove portion is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and is formed so as to be able to accept the pin member. D1 is characterized in that, at least in the first position, the pin member is received in the recess so that the moving member is mechanically held in the first position.

According to the gaming machine D1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the rotating member is rotated around the second axis by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the pin member arranged on the rotating member is rotated. Is guided along the guide groove portion of the moving member. Since the pin member is positioned eccentrically from the second axis of the rotating member, the moving member moves between the first position and the second position as the pin member is guided along the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. It is rotated around one axis.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first axis, a moving member rotated around the first axis, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member are provided, and the driving force of the driving means is provided. There is a gaming machine that rotates a moving member between a first position and a second position with a first axis as a rotation center (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640). In this case, for example, when the first position is set to the ascending position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member arranged in the first position from moving (descending) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the moving force of the driving means is opposed to gravity (weight of the moving member) to regulate the movement (descending) of the moving member (that is, the moving member is held in the first position). Because of the structure, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member is high.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least in the first position, the moving member is mechanically held in the first position by receiving the pin member in the recess recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. .. That is, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be mechanically held at the first position, so that the energy consumption of the driving means can be suppressed by that amount.

Further, since the structure is such that the pin member is received in the recess recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and the moving member is mechanically held in the first position, the moving member is mechanically held in the first position only by the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the guide groove portion and the rotating member as compared with the structure for holding the guide groove portion.

The recess does not have to be bottomed and may penetrate. That is, it suffices to have inner wall surfaces that communicate with the guide groove and face each other. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions shown below.

In the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first axis and the pin member, and the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to the above.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, at least in the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first axis and the pin member. Moreover, since it is arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, rotation about the first axis of the moving member even when the driving force of the driving means is released. Is that the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member in a direction parallel to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member. Therefore, depending on the pressing of the pin member due to the rotation of the moving member, the rotating member may be pressed. It is not possible to form a rotation about the second axis. As a result, the moving member can be held more firmly at the first position. Therefore, for example, when the player hits or shakes the gaming machine, even if the moving member is shaken, the moving member can be reliably held in the first position and moves downward in the direction of gravity (). It is possible to prevent it from descending).

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is formed by being curved in an arc shape about the second axis of the rotating member in a state where the moving member is arranged at the first position. The gaming machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved in an arc shape centered on the second axis of the rotating member in the state where the moving member is arranged at the first position. After the moving member is arranged at the first position, the pin member can be received in the recess while suppressing the posture of the moving member from fluctuating.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is the facing inner wall surface of the guide groove portion, and the pin member slides when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is recessed in the inner wall surface on the side of the slingshot.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is the facing inner wall surface of the guide groove portion, and when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. Since the pin member is recessed in the inner wall surface on the sliding side, the moving member can be moved from the second position to the first position without switching the driving direction of the driving means (rotational direction of the rotating member). , The pin member can be received in the recess and the moving member can be held in the first position.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the recess is a facing inner wall surface of the guide groove portion, and is recessed in the inner wall surface on the side closer to the first axis.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the recess is the facing inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and is recessed in the inner wall surface on the side closer to the first axis. A recess can be provided in a region that becomes a dead space between the guide groove portion and the first shaft, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by arranging the recess on the first axis side in this way, the distance between the first axis and the pin member when the moving member is arranged at the first position can be further shortened, so that the moving member can be shortened. It is possible to reduce the force with which the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member with the rotation about the first axis. As a result, the moving member can be held more firmly at the first position.

A moving member formed so as to be slidable, a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member are provided. The gaming machine includes a base member having a slide hole formed as an opening extending along the slide movement direction of the moving member, and the moving member is inserted into a plurality of slide holes of the base member. The transmission means is provided on the other side of the base member, which is opposite to one side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged, and the driving force of the driving means is moved. A link member that transmits to the member is provided, and the link member projects to the other surface side of the base member through a slide hole of the base member. A gaming machine E1 characterized by being connected to.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the link member of the transmitting means is displaced by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the displacement of the link member is transmitted to the protruding portion of the moving member. Will be done. As a result, the protruding portion of the moving member is moved along the slide hole, so that the moving member is slid and moved.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed so as to be slidable, a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means are moved. There is a gaming machine provided with a transmission means for transmitting to a member, and the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the moving member by the transmitting means to slide and move the moving member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-229885). .. In this case, in order to stably slide the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of protruding portions to be inserted into the slide holes. On the other hand, if the number of protruding portions is increased, the number of parts for holding the protruding portions (preventing them from coming off from the slide hole) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing costs while stabilizing the sliding movement of the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a link member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and the link member is opposite to one side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged. It is arranged on the other side of the base member on the side, and is connected to at least one of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that is projected to the other side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Therefore, at least one of the parts for holding the protrusion can be used as the link member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of protrusions, enable stable slide movement of the moving member, reduce the number of parts for holding the protrusions, and reduce the cost.

In the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the link member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the drive means to the link member, and the base member has a connection hole formed as an opening. The driving means and the connecting member of the transmitting means are arranged on one side of the base member, and the connecting member is connected to the link member through the connecting hole of the base member. Pachinko machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connecting member connected to the link member and transmitting the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the link member, and a connection formed as an opening. Since the base member has a hole and the connecting member is connected to the link member through the connecting hole of the base member, the connecting member of the driving means and the transmitting means can be arranged on one surface side of the base member together with the moving member. can. As a result, the constituent members can be concentrated on one surface side of the base member (that is, the arrangement of the constituent members on the other surface side of the base member can be suppressed), and as a result, the space can be efficiently used. It is possible to reduce the size as a whole.

In the gaming machine E2, the link member of the transmission means is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member. That is, in the transmission means, a connecting member is arranged on one surface side of the base member, a link member is arranged on the other surface side of the base member, and these connecting members and the link member are connected via the connecting holes of the base member. Therefore, the transmission path of the driving force formed by these connecting members and link members becomes long. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted, the connecting member and the link member may be deformed and may not be stably transmitted to the moving member. On the other hand, since the link member is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member, the rigidity of the base member is used to increase the rigidity of the connecting member and the link member as a whole. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member via the connecting member and the link member.

In particular, in the gaming machine E3, since the link member among the connecting member and the link member is rotatably supported by the base member, the base member is rotatably supported as compared with the case where the connecting member is rotatably supported by the base member. The distance from the shaft support point to the protrusion of the moving member can be shortened, and as a result, stabilization of transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member can be achieved with fewer shaft support points.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is arranged in a posture perpendicular to the extending direction of the slide hole, and the moving member is arranged along the slide hole of the base member. E4 is a gaming machine characterized by being slid and moved in the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is perpendicular to the base member. Since the moving member is slid and moved in the vertical direction along the slide hole of the above, the moving member can be stably slid and moved by making the configuration in which the link member is arranged on the other surface side of the base member effective. That is, when the base member is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is the vertical direction, the moving member is in a forward leaning posture toward a direction away from one surface side of the base member due to the action of gravity. Since the base member is interposed between the link member connected to the moving member and the moving member, the forward leaning posture of the moving member is regulated not only by the parts for holding the protruding portion but also by the link member. As a result, the moving member can be slid and moved in a stable state.

In the gaming machine E4, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the link member is connected to a protrusion located above at least the center of the moving member.

According to the gaming machine E5, since the link member is connected to the protruding portion located at least above the center of the moving member, the link member is tilted forward toward a direction away from one surface side of the base member by the action of gravity. The forward leaning posture of the moving member can be effectively regulated by the link member with respect to the moving member, and as a result, the moving member can be slid and moved in a more stable state.

A game including a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, in the transmission means, a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means and a tooth surface meshed with the pinion are arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane and displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates. The rack is provided with a link member having one end connected to the rack and the other end connected to the moving member so as to stand or tilt with the horizontal movement of the rack. The moving member is arranged in the ascending position and the moving member is arranged in the descending position due to the tilting of the link member. At the ascending position of the moving member, the direction connecting one end and the other end of the link member is the direction of the rack. The gaming machine F1 is located in a plane orthogonal to each of the tooth surface and the moving direction of the rack.

According to the game machine F1, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the link member is displaced due to the displacement to one side in the horizontal direction of the rack. As the link member is tilted and the link member is tilted, the moving member moves downward (descends) toward the lower position, while when the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction due to the rotation of the pinion, the horizontal direction of the rack etc. The link member is erected with the displacement to the side, and as the link member is erected, the moving member is moved (raised) upward toward the ascending position.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force applied to the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member. There is a gaming machine in which a transmission means is formed by including a rack and pinion as a part of a transmission path of a driving force (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-065923). In this case, when the moving member is placed in the ascending position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (descending) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the moving force of the driving means is opposed to gravity (weight of the moving member) to regulate the movement (descending) of the moving member (that is, the moving member is held in the ascending position). ) Due to the structure, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member is high.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, at the ascending position of the moving member, the direction connecting one end and the other end of the link member is located in a plane orthogonal to each of the tooth surface of the rack and the moving direction of the rack. As a force component acting on the rack from the link member, it is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction of moving the rack in the horizontal direction. As a result, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be held in the ascending position, and as a result, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1, the transmission means includes a base member in which the pinion and the rack of the transmission means are rotatably and movably arranged, respectively, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member, and the link member includes the link member. The base member is arranged facing each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base member is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members when the moving member is arranged in the raised position, and the pair of links. The gaming machine F2 is provided with an interposition portion formed so as to be able to come into contact with the facing surfaces of the members.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, when the moving member is arranged in the ascending position, it is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members and on the facing surfaces of the pair of link members. Since the base member is provided with an interposition portion formed so as to be abuttable, the posture of the moving member can be stabilized in the ascending position. That is, in the ascending position, since the pair of link members are erected, it is difficult to maintain the posture, and the posture of the moving member tends to be unstable. By doing so, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the pair of link members in the facing direction (that is, the moving direction of the rack) by the interposing portion. As a result, the pair of link members can be maintained in an upright state, and the posture of the moving member can be stabilized in the ascending position.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the transmission means includes a base member in which the pinion and the rack of the transmission means are rotatably and movably arranged, respectively, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member and the link member. Are arranged facing each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base member is a pair of facing wall portions extending along the moving direction of the rack and facing each other at predetermined intervals. The gaming machine F3 is provided, wherein one end side of the pair of link members is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member includes a pair of facing wall portions extending along the moving direction of the rack and arranged facing each other at predetermined intervals. Therefore, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture. That is, since a pair of link members are arranged facing each other along the moving direction of the rack, the pair of link members arranged facing each other in the moving direction of the rack cancel each other's displacements. It is possible to fit and maintain that posture. On the other hand, since the moving member of the link member is offset in the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack, the position of the center of gravity of the link member tends to change due to the input of disturbance, and it is difficult to maintain the posture. However, since one end side of the pair of link members is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions, the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack of the pair of link members by the pair of facing wall portions. The displacement to can be regulated. As a result, the posture of the pair of link members can be maintained and the moving members can be moved in a stable posture.

The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that at least one of the pair of facing wall portions of the base member is raised in height as the moving member approaches the ascending position.

According to the gaming machine F4, as the moving member approaches the ascending position (that is, as the link member stands up), the height of the facing wall portion is increased (that is, one end of the link member with respect to the facing wall portion). Since the area facing the side is increased), it is possible to stabilize the movement of the moving member while improving the appearance. That is, by partially increasing the height of the facing wall portion instead of increasing it as a whole, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being spoiled by the facing wall portion, and the link member is erected (that is,). (It becomes difficult to move the moving member in a stable posture), the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member can be enhanced by the facing wall portion. As a result, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture while suppressing the appearance from being spoiled.

In this case, at least one of the pair of facing wall portions of the base member, the portion where the standing height is raised is in a state where the moving member is arranged in the descending position (that is, the link member is laid down). It is preferable to set the height so that it can face the other end side of the link member (the side connected to the moving member). According to this configuration, the effect of maintaining the posture of the moving member arranged in the descending position can be obtained at the same time by utilizing the portion where the standing height is increased in order to stabilize the posture of the moving member during movement. Can be done.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, an extending member extending in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack is provided, and the moving member is slidably connected to the extending member and is extended. The extension member is provided with a guide portion that is guided along the extension direction of the member, and the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and orthogonal to the movement direction of the rack. The gaming machine F5 is provided between the link member and the position of the center of gravity of the moving member in a direction in which the moving member is offset.

According to the game machine F5, in any of the game machines F1 to F4, an extension member extending in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and guiding a guide portion of the moving member along the extension direction is provided. The extension member is arranged between the link member and the position of the center of gravity of the moving member in the direction in which the moving member is offset, so that the effect of offsetting the moving member (that is, necessary for holding the moving member) is provided. It is possible to ensure smooth movement of moving members while demonstrating (reduction of energy consumption).

When a pair of link members is provided and an interposing portion is provided between the pair of link members facing each other, it is preferable to dispose the extending member inside the interposing portion. An extension member is placed in the central part where the pair of link members face each other, and while enhancing the effect of guiding the movement of the moving member, the inside of the intermediate part that becomes a dead space is effectively utilized to reduce the size as a whole. Because it can be done.

A game including a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving force to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission member has a first transmission member having at least a part of teeth and to which the moving member is connected, and a second having at least a part of teeth that can be meshed with the teeth of the first transmission member. A transmission member and a connecting member connected to the second transmission member and transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second transmission member are provided, and the connecting member is continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that teeth are formed.

According to the gaming machine G1, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second transmission member via the connecting member, the second transmission member is rotated, and the rotation of the second transmission member causes the teeth of each other to rotate. It is transmitted to the first transmission member via the above, and the first transmission member is rotated. As a result, the moving member connected to the first transmission member is moved with the rotation of the first transmission member.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means are transferred to the moving member. A first transmission member having a transmission means to be transmitted and to which a moving member is connected, and a second transmission member that is meshed with the first transmission member and transmits the driving force of the drive means to the first transmission member through the meshing. There is a gaming machine in which a part of the driving means is formed by the transmission member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-10376). In this case, the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first transmission member meshed with the second transmission member is rotated so that the moving member connected to the first transmission member is rotated. It is moved with the rotation of the first transmission member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the moving member is connected to the first transmission member, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move the moving member. If the moving member shakes during this period, the first transmission member may be displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, and the teeth with the second transmission member may be disengaged. Even if it is possible to prevent the teeth of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from coming off, the tooth engagement area of the second transmission member with the teeth is increased by the amount that the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member. As the surface pressure is concentrated on a part of the tooth surface due to the decrease, uneven wear of the tooth may be caused and the durability may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since the connecting member has teeth continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member, even if the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, the teeth are formed. The teeth of the first transmission member can be meshed with the teeth formed on the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the teeth of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from being disengaged. Further, when the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, the tooth engagement area between the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member and the connecting member can be secured, so that the deviation of each of these teeth can be secured. It is possible to suppress wear and improve durability.

The teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, but may be formed in a part in the circumferential direction. The same applies to the following. The same applies to other gears.

In the gaming machine G1, the connecting member is erected from the axial end face of the second transmission member along the axial direction of the second transmission member, and the tooth forming portion on which the tooth is formed and the tooth forming thereof. The tooth-forming portion is provided with a main body portion connected to the erected tip of the portion, and the surface of the tooth-forming portion on the side opposite to the side on which the tooth is formed is curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G2 characterized by being formed as a concave curved surface.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is erected from the axial end face of the second transmitting member along the axial direction of the second transmitting member, and the second Since the surface opposite to the side on which the continuous teeth are formed on the teeth of the transmission member is formed as an arcuately curved concave curved surface centered on the axis of the second transmission member, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member can be formed. Even when connecting to the axial end face of the second transmission member, the area of the axial end face of the second transmission member can be secured, and the fixing member mounted on the axial end face of the second transmission member is increased by that amount. It can be made into a diameter. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from the resin material, the tooth-forming portion is formed by forming the surface opposite to the surface on which the teeth are formed as a concave curved surface as described above. It is possible to make the wall thickness in the above uniform and improve its formability.

In the gaming machine G2, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over a range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over a range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion, so that teeth are formed. It is possible to more reliably suppress the disengagement of the teeth of the first transmission member and the second transmission member by sufficiently securing the area to be formed. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from the resin material, the teeth are formed over the entire tooth forming portion as described above, so that the wall thickness in the tooth forming portion is the entire thickness. It is possible to improve the formability by making it uniform over the entire range.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the second moving member to which the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are arranged and formed movably, and a guide for guiding the second moving member in a linear direction. The transmission means includes a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a rack that is meshed with the pinion and displaced with the rotation of the pinion, and the connecting member comprises. The gaming machine G4, characterized in that one end is connected to the rack and the other end is connected to the second transmission member.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, a second moving member in which the first transmission member and the second transmission member are arranged is provided, and the second moving member is a guide member. The transmission means is provided with a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means and a rack that is meshed with the pinion and displaced with the rotation of the pinion, and the connecting member is attached to the rack. Since one end is connected and the other end is connected to the second transmission member, the rack and pinion is operated by the driving force of the driving means to displace the connecting member, and the second is caused by the displacement of the connecting member. The rotation of the transmission member and the linear movement of the second moving member can be performed at the same time. That is, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member meshed with the second transmitting member, the moving member can be linearly moved together with the second moving member while rotating the moving member. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, since the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member and the transmission to the second moving member can be shared by one member (connecting member), the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be planned.

In the game machine G4, in the rack, the tooth surface to be meshed with the pinion is arranged substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction with the rotation of the pinion, and the second moving member is horizontal to the rack. Along with the displacement in the direction, the guide member guides the connecting member in the vertical direction, and when the second moving member is arranged in the ascending position, the tooth formed in the tooth forming portion is transmitted to the first transmission member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member.

According to the game machine G5, in the rack, the tooth surface to be meshed with the pinion is arranged substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction with the rotation of the pinion, and the second moving member is moved in the horizontal direction of the rack. Since the guide member guides the rack in the vertical direction along with the displacement, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is moved to one side in the horizontal direction. The connecting member is tilted due to the displacement of, and as the connecting member is tilted, the second moving member is moved downward (downward) toward the lower position, while the rack is horizontally displaced to the other side due to the rotation of the pinion. Then, the connecting member is erected along with the displacement of the rack to the other side in the horizontal direction, and as the connecting member is erected, the second moving member is moved (raised) upward toward the ascending position.

In this case, in the state where the second moving member is arranged in the raised position, it is difficult to maintain the posture because the connecting member is erected, and the posture of the second moving member becomes unstable. Along with this, the posture of the moving member arranged on the second moving member becomes more unstable. Therefore, the shaking of the second moving member makes the shaking of the moving member more remarkable, and the displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member becomes large. That is, in the state where the second moving member is arranged in the raised position, the teeth of the first transmission member and the second transmission member are likely to come off.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, when the second moving member is arranged in the ascending position, the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion are first transmitted to the connecting member. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member, the displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member becomes large, and the tooth engagement between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is most likely to come off. , The teeth formed in the tooth forming portion can be effectively utilized. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the disengagement of the teeth between the first transmission member and the second transmission member.

In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the transmission means has teeth on the rack, a connecting member to which one end is connected to the rack, a second transmission member to which the other end of the connecting member is connected, and the second transmission member. A pair of a pair of a first transmission member to be combined and a moving member connected to the first transmission member is provided, and one set of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is the first transmission of the other set. One set and the other set may be arranged so as to face each other along the moving direction of the rack while being toothed with the member and the second transmission member, respectively. According to this, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy between the moving member in one set and the moving member in the other set. Further, even if only the first transmission member or only the second transmission member is meshed with each other, the synchronization accuracy of the moving member can be improved, and the first transmission member and the second transmission member are By engaging each tooth, the tooth alignment location (dental area) can be increased and the surface pressure of the tooth surface can be dispersed by that amount, so that the durability can be improved.

A plurality of movable members formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the plurality of moving members, respectively. In a gaming machine in which the plurality of moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and the plurality of moving members are combined by being moved from the different retracted positions and arranged at a reference position. The plurality of moving members are moved in a direction close to each other and arranged next to each other at the reference position, and the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other. A third moving member that comes into contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member from substantially orthogonal directions is provided, and the third moving member is the first moving member and the second moving member at the reference position. By abutting on each of the members, a force is formed in the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are combined. The gaming machine H1 characterized by being evacuated.

According to the gaming machine H1, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member by the transmitting means, so that the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are transmitted. The moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and are moved from different retracted positions and placed at the reference position.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of movable members formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a driving force of the driving means are used. A plurality of moving members are provided with transmission means for transmitting to each of the plurality of moving members, and the plurality of moving members are retracted to different retracted positions and moved from different retracted positions and arranged at reference positions. There is a gaming machine to which the above is combined (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-115300). In this case, if the plurality of moving members are not properly connected at the reference position, the effect of connecting the plurality of moving members is impaired. However, it is relatively easy to connect a pair of symmetrically shaped moving members facing each other as in the conventional gaming machine described above, but it is difficult to connect three or more moving members.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged side by side at the reference position, and are substantially orthogonal to the adjacent directions of the first moving member and the second moving member. When the third moving member moved from the direction toward the first moving member and the second moving member comes into contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member, the first moving member and the second moving member are moved. Since the force is formed in the direction in which they are close to each other, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be appropriately connected. As a result, it is possible to secure the effect of producing by connecting a plurality of moving members.

In the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member are provided with a first contact portion and a second contact portion, respectively, and are in contact with each of the first contact portion and the second contact portion. The third moving member is provided with a third contact portion, and the third contact portion of the third moving member is attached to the first contact portion and the second contact portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. When they are brought into contact with each other, a force is formed in the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, and the first moving member and the second moving member face the third moving member. The appearance shape on the side is formed by the first contact portion and the second contact portion, and is a concave shape that is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. In the third moving member, the appearance shape of the first moving member and the side facing the second moving member is formed by the third contact portion, and the first moving member and the second moving member have a concave shape. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that it has a protruding shape in which the center protrudes correspondingly.

According to the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged next to each other at the reference position, with respect to the first contact portion and the second contact portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. When the third contact portion of the third moving member is brought into contact with each other, a force is formed in the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, thereby forming the first moving member and the second moving member. And the third moving member is coupled.

In this case, the first moving member and the second moving member have a concave shape in which the center is recessed in the appearance shape (combination of the first contact portion and the second contact portion) on the side facing the third moving member. On the other hand, in the third moving member, the appearance shape (third contact portion) of the first moving member and the side facing the second moving member is centered corresponding to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. Since the projecting shape is such that the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are moved from the retracted position to the reference position, the effect of the effect is improved by connecting the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member at the reference position. be able to.

That is, as described above, the appearance shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member and the third moving member on the opposite sides are concave, and the first moving member and the second moving member arranged next to each other have a concave shape. In the form in which the third moving member that is moved toward the concave shape has a protruding shape, the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other when the third moving member is arranged from the retracted position to the reference position. The player is reminded of a mode in which the third moving member enters between the members and pushes and spreads the first moving member and the second moving member in a direction away from each other. According to the gaming machine H2, the third moving member moves at the reference position. When the member (third contact portion) is in contact with the first moving member and the second moving member (first contact portion and second contact portion), the first moving member and the second moving member are brought into contact with each other. The first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be combined by forming a force in the approaching direction. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, it can be operated in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are supported by the base member by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, respectively, and the first moving member and the second moving member are supported at the reference position. In the state where they are arranged side by side, the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism may be arranged in a V shape in which the distance between the first moving member and the second moving member side is narrowed with respect to the base member side. preferable. By setting the angle formed by the first contact portion and the second contact portion and the third contact portion with respect to the angle formed by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, the first movement is performed at the reference position. This is because a force can be formed in the direction in which the member and the second moving member are brought close to each other.

In the gaming machine H1, the appearance shape of the first moving member and the second moving member on the side facing the third moving member is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. While the third moving member has a concave shape, the appearance shape of the third moving member on the side facing the first moving member and the second moving member corresponds to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. The gaming machine H3 characterized by having a protruding shape with a protruding center.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the appearance shape of the first moving member and the second moving member on the side facing the third moving member is a concave shape with a concave center. The third moving member has an external shape on the side facing the first moving member and the second moving member, and has a protruding shape in which the center protrudes corresponding to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by moving the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member from the retracted position to the reference position and connecting them at the reference position.

That is, as described above, the appearance shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member and the third moving member on the opposite sides are concave, and the first moving member and the second moving member arranged next to each other have a concave shape. In the form in which the third moving member that is moved toward the concave shape has a protruding shape, the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other when the third moving member is arranged from the retracted position to the reference position. The player is reminded of a mode in which the third moving member enters between the members and pushes and spreads the first moving member and the second moving member in a direction away from each other. According to the gaming machine H3, the third moving member moves at the reference position. When the members are brought into contact with each other, a force is formed in the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are connected to each other. Can be done. As a result, the player can be operated in a manner different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H3, the first moving member and the second moving member are provided with a first contact surface and a second contact surface, and are in contact with each of the first contact surface and the second contact surface. The third moving member includes a third contact surface, and at least one of the third contact surface, the first contact surface, and the second contact surface has the third moving member at the reference position. It is formed as an inclined surface that expands toward the traveling direction side when it is moved toward, and the third contact surface is abutted from both sides of the first contact surface and the second contact surface. The gaming machine H4, characterized in that the moving member and the second moving member are displaced in a direction in which the moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, at least one of the third contact surface, the first contact surface, and the second contact surface has the third moving member directed toward the reference position. It is formed as an inclined surface that expands toward the traveling direction side when it is moved, and the third contact surface is abutted from both sides of the first contact surface and the second contact surface, so that the first moving member Since the second moving member and the second moving member are displaced in a direction close to each other, the first moving member and the second moving member can be reliably displaced in a direction close to each other. Therefore, the structure that makes the first moving member and the second moving member movable can be simplified, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure can be increased.

In the gaming machine H4, the first contact surface and the second contact surface are arranged on the back surface side of the portion forming the appearance shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively, and the third one. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the contact surface is arranged on the back surface side of a portion forming the appearance shape of the third moving member.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H4, the first contact surface and the second contact surface are arranged on the back side of the portion forming the appearance shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively. Since the third contact surface is arranged on the back surface side of the portion forming the appearance shape of the third moving member, the first contact surface, the second contact surface, and the third contact surface are provided. Can be suppressed from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the appearance shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of operating in a mode different from the player's expectation.

A moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving force to the moving member are provided. In a gaming machine in which the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member that is meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member The gaming machine I1 comprising a positioning means for positioning the meshing position in the predetermined phase.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means are transferred to the moving member. There is a gaming machine provided with a transmission means for transmission, wherein the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase (for example, special feature). Kai 2009-125902 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-12502). According to this gaming machine, when one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the rotation of one of them rotates the other of the first transmission member or the second transmission member. The moving member is moved by the rotation of the other side. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the second transmission member is not meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the movement range of the moving member is deviated. Therefore, when assembling (together) the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is necessary to position the tooth engagement position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase before assembling. The positioning work was complicated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the positioning means for positioning the tooth alignment position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase is provided, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled (teeth). At the time of (matching), the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be assembled by using the positioning means. That is, when the toothing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member is positioned at a predetermined phase, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

As described above, the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, but may be formed in a part in the circumferential direction.

In the gaming machine I1, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are rotatably supported by a base member, and the positioning means is a first base positioning unit and a second base positioning unit formed on the base member. And the first transmission member positioning section and the second transmission member positioning section formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, at positions corresponding to the first base positioning section and the second base positioning section. A gaming machine I2 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed on the base member, and the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are supported. Since the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, the first transmission member positioning portion is matched with the first base positioning portion, and the first transmission member positioning portion is matched. By assembling the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the base member while matching the second transmission member positioning portion with the second base positioning portion, the second transmission member is brought into a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. Can be positioned. As a result, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

In particular, when at least one of the first base positioning portion or the first transmission member positioning portion and at least one of the second base positioning portion or the second transmission member positioning portion is formed as a through hole, such one penetration. By inserting the jig into the hole and abutting (or inserting) the tip of the inserted jig against the other, it is easier to position the second transmission member in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. It can be done accurately and accurately.

In the gaming machine I2, the base member includes a first axis and a second axis that are projected toward the front surface of the base member and inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first base positioning is provided. The gaming machine I3, wherein the portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, when the base member includes a first axis and a second axis protruding from the front surface of the base member and being inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the first transmission member and the second transmission are positioned while positioning the second transmission member in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. When assembling the member to the base member, it is possible to perform the positioning work and the assembling work at the same time, and the workability can be improved.

That is, according to the gaming machine I3, since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the jig is inserted from the back surface of the base member to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. Thereby, the jig can be projected from the front surface of the base member together with the first axis and the second axis. As a result, at the same time as the work of assembling (inserting) the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the first shaft and the second shaft from the front of the base member, the tip of the jig is brought into contact with the first transmission member and the second transmission member. It is possible to perform the positioning work of contacting (or inserting) the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion. As a result, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and the first transmission member positioning portion is formed as a through hole at positions corresponding to each other of the pair of members. A gaming machine I4 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and the first transmission member is located at a position corresponding to each other of the pair of members. Since the positioning portions are formed as through holes, the positioning work of these pair of gears can be performed at the same time, and the workability of the positioning work can be improved accordingly. Further, since the positioning work of these pair of gears can be performed by using a common jig, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to connect the pair of gears to each other, the pair of gears can be pivotally supported on a common shaft so as to be relatively rotatable. The second transmission member may be similarly configured.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member is composed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and the pair of members has a protrusion protruding from one member and a protrusion thereof. It is characterized in that it is provided with a recess recessed in the other member for receiving, and the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in a member arranged on the base member side of the pair of members. Game machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member is composed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and is a member arranged on the base member side of the pair of members. Since the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in the above, the member arranged on the base member side of the pair of members can be positioned in a predetermined phase by using the second transmission member positioning portion. .. In this case, the pair of members can position the pair of members in a predetermined phase by accepting the protrusion of one member into the recess of the other member, and can not rotate relative to each other (that is, synchronously). It can be pivotally supported on a common shaft (rotatable). In particular, since the protrusions of the pair of members are received by the recesses and fitted to each other, the rigidity as a whole can be increased by that amount.

The recess does not have to be bottomed and may be formed as a through hole. That is, it suffices if the recess is formed so as to be able to receive the connecting protrusion and be positioned in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) when the pair of members are coaxially overlapped.

A game including a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and an out opening for discharging a game ball that has flowed down without being won in the plurality of winning openings from the game area. In the machine, the first winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is close to the lower edge of the gaming area or close to the position where the game ball cannot pass between the winning opening and the lower edge of the gaming area. The out port is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the out port is a first out port arranged on one side of the game area in the width direction with respect to the first winning opening, and the first out port. The gaming machine J1 is provided with a second out opening arranged on the other side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the winning opening.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and a game ball that has flowed down without being won by the plurality of winning openings are used in the gaming area. There is a gaming machine provided with an out port for discharging from (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143268). In recent years, in order to enhance the effect of production, it is required to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, if the position of the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device is lowered downward, the position of the winning opening must be lowered accordingly. At some point, if the position of the winning opening is lowered too much, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the winning opening (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). That is, the game ball that has flowed down without being won in the winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning opening downward, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device cannot be made sufficiently large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the out openings are the first out opening arranged on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening among the plurality of winning openings, and the first one. Since it is provided with a second out opening arranged on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the winning opening, the first winning opening is not won and is on one side in the width direction from the first winning opening. A game ball that has flowed down can be discharged from the game area by the first out opening, while a game ball that has flowed down to the other side in the width direction from the first winning opening without being won in the first winning opening is the second. It can be discharged from the game area by the out port of. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the first winning opening (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the first winning opening can be lowered further downward (that is, to a position where the game ball cannot pass between the lower edge of the game area and the game area), and the liquid crystal display device can be used accordingly. Can be increased in size.

The gaming machine J1 is provided with an effect member for performing an effect associated with the winning of a game ball to the second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings, and a gaming board in which the gaming area is formed on the front side transmits light. The effect member is made of a sex material, and the effect member is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back surface side of the gaming board, and the second winning port and the effect member are placed in the first winning port. On the other hand, the gaming machine J2 is arranged on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the effecting member is provided with an effecting member for performing an effect accompanying the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the gaming board made of a light-transmitting material, the scene is for the player who visually recognizes the scene where the game ball is won in the second winning opening. The effect of the effect member can be visually recognized at the same time behind the above, and the effect associated with the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening can be effectively performed.

In this case, since the second winning opening and the effecting member are arranged on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, the positions of the second winning opening and the effecting member. Can be lowered downward, and the position of the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly. As a result, the liquid crystal display device can be made larger even when the effect member is arranged.

That is, disposing the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening hinders the increase in size of the liquid crystal display device because the effect member interferes with the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the first out opening and the second out opening are arranged on one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the first winning opening. Not only can the position of the winning opening of 1 be lowered downward, but also the degree of freedom of the arrangement position on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the game area of the first winning opening can be secured. It is possible to secure a space for arranging the second winning opening and the effect member, and as a result, according to the gaming machine J2, the layout is such that the effect member is arranged on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening. Is now possible.

In the gaming machine J2, the gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the second winning opening is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the second winning opening is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction of the gaming area, so that the size of the liquid crystal display device is increased and the gaming area is limited. It is possible to effectively utilize the reserved space and secure a wider space for arranging the effect members. That is, with such a layout, it is possible to efficiently increase the size of both the liquid crystal display device and the staging member. Further, by disposing the second winning opening substantially in the center in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to lengthen the flow path of the game ball to the second winning opening. As a result, it is possible to enhance the playability for winning the game ball to the second winning opening, and also to raise the expectation for the staging by the staging member accompanying the winning to the second winning opening.

The gaming machine J2 or J3 includes a second staging member arranged on the back side of the gaming board, and the second staging member is arranged at a position where at least a part of the second staging member overlaps the staging member in front view. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being installed.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of the game machine J2 or J3, a second effect member arranged on the back side of the game board is provided, and the second effect member is at least one in the front view. Since the portion is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the effect member, when the game board is formed of a light-transmitting material, only the necessary part of the second effect member is made visible to the player, and the other part is produced. It can be shielded from the player by the member. As a result, it is not necessary to design the second staging member on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved.

A gaming machine J5, wherein in any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the staging member is formed in a circular shape that can rotate around the second winning opening.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the staging member is formed in a circular shape that can rotate around the second winning opening, and thus surrounds the second winning opening. It is possible to produce an effect in the entire area, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the winning of the second winning opening.

In this case, the second winning opening must be arranged at a position where a space for allowing the game ball to flow down can be secured both above and below the winning opening, and the second winning opening is located in the game area with respect to the second winning opening. Since the first winning opening is arranged on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction and below the game area, the staging member is formed in a circle centered on the second winning opening. Therefore, the space that can be secured around the second winning opening can be effectively utilized, and as a result, the area of the staging member can be increased and the staging effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic K group> (Displays the notice display mode in the normal background during SPGT)
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to be displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine provided with a timing means capable of measuring even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, a time information determining means for determining whether the time information of the timing means is a defined set time information. The state switching means for switching from the first effect state set in the normal time to the second effect state for a predetermined period based on the determination of the set time information by the time information determination means, and the above-mentioned state switching means. A plurality of background images displayed on the display means, selected by the background selection means for selecting the background image associated with each of the first effect state and the second effect state, and the background selection means. Depending on the type of the background image, while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means, the effect mode to be displayed on the display means is displayed in a plurality of effects associated with the background image. 1 is provided with an effect selection means capable of selecting the effect from 1, and the effect selection means selects the effect mode from the first effect mode group when the first effect state is set. When the second effect state is set, the gaming machine is characterized in that the effect mode is selected from the first effect mode group and the second effect mode group, respectively. K1.

According to the gaming machine K1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the predetermined lottery conditions. The identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. The identification information to be displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the time is measured by the time measuring means. The time information discriminating means determines whether the time information of the timekeeping means is the defined set time information. Based on the determination of the set time information by the time information determination means, the state switching means switches from the first effect state set at the normal time to the second effect state for a predetermined period. A plurality of background images displayed on the display means, and background images associated with each of the first effect state and the second effect state are selected by the background selection means. According to the type of the background image selected by the background selection means, while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means, a plurality of staging modes to be displayed on the display means are associated with the background image. One of the effects is selected by the effect selection means. When the first effect state is set, the effect mode is selected from the first effect mode group, and when the second effect state is set, the first effect mode group and the above are described. An effect mode is selected from the second effect mode group by the effect mode selection means. As a result, even when the second effect state is set, various effect modes are selected, so that the effect of the game can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine K1, the background selection means selects one background image from the plurality of different background images dedicated to the first effect state based on the setting of the first effect state, and the background image is described. When the background image dedicated to the first effect state and the background image dedicated to the second effect state are selected based on the setting of the second effect state, and the second effect state is selected. Is a gaming machine K2 characterized in that the background image in the second effect state is forcibly displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the background selection means, one background image is selected by the background selection means from among a plurality of different background images dedicated to the first effect state based on the setting of the first effect state. Based on the setting of the second effect state, the background image dedicated to the first effect state and the background image dedicated to the second effect state are selected by the background selection means. When the second effect state is selected, the background image of the second effect state is forcibly displayed on the display means. As a result, when the time measured by the time measuring means reaches the set time, it is possible to change to the dedicated background image at the timing synchronized with the plurality of gaming machines. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an impactful effect.

In the game machine K1 or K2, when the first effect state is set, the effect selection means selects a dedicated effect mode based on the background image selected by the background selection means. When the second effect state is set, a dedicated effect mode corresponding to the background image dedicated to the first effect state selected by the background selection means and a background image dedicated to the second effect state. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that each of the dedicated production modes corresponding to the above is selected.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the first effect state is set, a dedicated effect mode based on the background image selected by the background selection means is selected. Will be done. When the second effect state is set, a dedicated effect mode corresponding to the background image dedicated to the first effect state selected by the background selection means and a dedicated effect corresponding to the background image dedicated to the second effect state are set. Since each of the effects is selected by the effect selection means, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player even when the second effect state is set.

<Characteristic L group> (Battle production is performed across the jackpot fluctuation and the jackpot round production)
Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, the display means capable of displaying the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means, and the identification information displayed on the display means are operated. A dynamic display means for displaying a target, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player after the identification information indicating a specific hit / fail determination result is displayed on the display means, and a privilege game execution means thereof. By the game state setting means for setting either the first game state set after the privileged game is executed or the second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state, and the game state setting means. In a gaming machine having a gaming state determining means for determining a set gaming state, the identification that is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means when the winning / failing determination result is the specific winning / failing determination result. As the dynamic display mode of the information, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the first dynamic display mode and the display means for displaying the effect mode while the privilege game executing means is executing the privilege game. It has an effect mode display means and an effect mode selection means for selecting the effect mode displayed by the effect mode display means based on the type of the game state determined by the game state determination means. (1) The dynamic display mode and the effect mode are displayed in combination with each other to provide a notification display mode for notifying the game state determined by the game state determining means. L1.

According to the gaming machine L1, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. The identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. After the identification information indicating a specific hit / fail determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Either the first game state set after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means or the second game state more advantageous than the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The game state set by the game state setting means is determined by the game state determination means. When the hit / fail determination result is a specific hit / fail determination result, the first dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means as the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. .. While the privilege game execution means is executing the privilege game, the effect mode is displayed on the display means by the effect mode display means. The effect mode displayed by the effect mode display means is selected by the effect mode selection means based on the type of the game state determined by the game state determination means. The first dynamic display mode and the effect mode are displayed in combination with each other to be a notification display mode for notifying the game state determined by the game state determination means. As a result, it is possible to set a long effect period for notifying the determined gaming state. Therefore, various effects can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, the display means capable of displaying the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means, and the identification information displayed on the display means are operated. The dynamic display means for displaying the target, the dynamic display time determining means for determining the time for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means, and the identification information indicating a specific hit / fail determination result are displayed on the display means. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and an effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode on the display means during the period during which the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. And a game state setting means for setting either a first game state set after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means or a second game state more advantageous than the first game state. , The dynamic display time determination when the hit / fail determination result is the specific hit / fail determination result in the gaming machine having the game state determining means for determining the game state set by the game state setting means. By a synthetic display time determining means for determining a composite display time including a display time in which the effect mode is displayed by the effect mode display means in a dynamic display time determined by the means, and a composite display time determining means thereof. It is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of state information indicating a gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means according to the determined synthetic display time. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed on the display means. The identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The time for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. After the identification information indicating a specific hit / fail determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. While the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, the effect mode is displayed on the display means by the effect mode display means. Either the first game state set after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means or the second game state more advantageous than the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The game state set by the game state setting means is determined by the game state determination means. When the hit / fail determination result is a specific hit / fail judgment result, the composite display time including the display time in which the effect mode is displayed by the effect mode display means in the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Is determined by the synthetic display time determining means. Corresponding to the synthetic display time determined by the synthetic display time determining means, the dynamic display mode of the state information indicating the gaming state determined by the game state determining means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. As a result, it is possible to set a long effect period for notifying the determined gaming state. Therefore, various effects can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic M group> (Synchronize the stop timing of the rotating accessory indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations with the temporary stop timing)
The acquisition means for acquiring information when the establishment of the start condition is detected, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Based on the information, the pass / fail determination means, the display means capable of displaying the identification information indicating the pass / fail determination result by the pass / fail determination means, and the dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification information to be displayed on the display means. The gaming machine provided with the means and a selection means for selecting the display mode of the identification information to be performed by the display means from among a plurality of types of display modes executed in the dynamic display of the identification information. Aspects include a pseudo-continuous mode, which is a display mode in which a pseudo-dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information, and is currently performed when the pseudo-continuous mode is executed. A rotatable rotating means having a notification mode on the front side for notifying how many times the pseudo dynamic display is a pseudo dynamic display since the start of the pseudo continuous mode, and its rotation. The gaming machine M1 is characterized by having a rotation control means for rotating the means and stopping the means at a position indicating a predetermined notification mode in synchronization with each dynamic display time of the pseudo continuous mode.

According to the gaming machine M1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when it is detected that the start condition is satisfied. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the winning / failing determination means is made based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means is displayed by the display means. The identification information to be displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The display mode of the identification information to be performed by the display means is selected by the selection means from a plurality of types of display modes executed in the dynamic display of the identification information. The display mode includes a pseudo continuous mode, which is a display mode in which a pseudo dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information. When the pseudo-continuous mode is executed, the notification mode for notifying how many times the pseudo-dynamic display currently being performed is the pseudo-dynamic display after the start of the pseudo-continuous mode is in front. The rotatable rotating means attached to the side is rotated and stopped by the rotation control means at a position indicating a predetermined notification mode in synchronization with each dynamic display time of the pseudo continuous mode. As a result, the stop timing of the pseudo-variation stop and the rotation means can be adjusted. Therefore, there is an effect that the player feels a sense of discomfort due to the difference between the notification of the number of pseudo fluctuations and the stop timing of the pseudo fluctuations.

In the gaming machine M1, the rotating means has a circular rotating portion, and a symbol indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations is attached to the circumferential surface on the front side of the rotating portion as the notification mode. The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the control means controls the symbol indicating the number of pseudo-variations to stop at a predetermined stop position in synchronization with the stop timing of the pseudo-variations.

According to the gaming machine M2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1. That is, it has a circular rotating portion, and a symbol indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations is attached to the rotating means as a notification mode on the circumferential surface on the front surface side of the rotating portion. The symbol indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations is controlled by the rotation control means so as to stop at a predetermined stop position in synchronization with the stop timing of the pseudo fluctuation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of pseudo fluctuations can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 has a discriminating means for determining the rotation start time of the rotating means so that the rotating means can be stopped at a predetermined stop position at the end timing of the dynamic display time of the pseudo fluctuation. The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the rotation control means starts the rotation of the rotation means according to the rotation start time determined by the discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 or M2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rotation start time of the rotating means is determined by the discriminating means so that the rotating means can be stopped at a predetermined stop position at the end timing of the dynamic display time of the pseudo fluctuation. The rotation of the rotation means is started by the rotation control means according to the rotation start time determined by the determination means. As a result, the rotating means can be controlled so that the stop position becomes a predetermined position. Therefore, there is an effect that the rotation means can be easily controlled.

In any of the game machines M1 to M3, when the rotation means is rotated, the rotation control means executes control to rotate the rotation means in a high speed state through a low speed state and stop the rotation control means at a predetermined position from the high speed state. A game machine M4 characterized by being something to do.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effects are played. That is, when the rotating means is rotated, the rotation control means executes control to rotate the rotating means in a high speed state via a low speed state and stop the rotating means at a predetermined position from the high speed state. Therefore, since the rotating means is stopped from the high-speed state, there is an effect that powerful notification can be given to the player.

<Characteristic N group> (By pressing and holding the SW, the variable speed of the SW charge effect is changed according to the remaining time of the SW effective time.)
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination of a game based on the establishment of a start condition, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination being a predetermined result. By the operation means that can be operated by the player, the validity period setting means that sets the validity period for which the operation is determined to be valid when the operation means is operated, and the validity period setting means. Based on the operation determination means for determining whether the operation condition is satisfied based on the operation when the validity period is set, and the operation determination means for determining whether the operation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine N1 is characterized by having an effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect and a condition variable setting means for variablely setting the operation condition based on the remaining period of the valid period. ..

According to the gaming machine N1, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the result of the hit / fail determination being a predetermined result, the privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. The operation means that can be operated by the player and the validity period for which the operation is determined to be valid when the operation means is operated are set by the validity period setting means. When the validity period is set by the validity period setting means, the operation determination means determines whether the operation condition is satisfied based on the operation. Based on the determination that the operation condition is satisfied by the operation determination means, a predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means. The operating conditions are variable based on the remaining period of the valid period and set by the condition variable setting means. As a result, the operating conditions are variably set based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that the conditions under which the effect is executed can be variably set. Therefore, the player can experience different games by changing the remaining period of the effective time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine N1, the operation determining means determines that the operation condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means has been continuously operated for a predetermined period or more within the valid period. The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the condition variable setting means is set by varying a predetermined period according to the remaining period of the valid period.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the operation determining means satisfies the operation condition when it is determined that the operating means has been continuously operated for a predetermined period or more within the valid period. Is determined by the operation determination means. It is set by the condition variable means by varying a predetermined period according to the remaining period of the valid period. Therefore, even if the remaining period of the valid period is short, the operation conditions can be easily satisfied, and there is an effect that the player can enjoy the production.

<Characteristic O group> (Set the weaknesses of the enemy, the hero's special skills, etc. based on the past history of the battle production)
A hit / fail determination means for executing a win / fail determination of a game based on the establishment of a start condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the hit / miss determination means, and an effect mode of the identification information to be displayed on the display means. A display information determining means for determining one display information from a plurality of display information when the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means and the effect display mode determining means is a specific effect mode, and a display information determining means thereof. A privilege is given to the player based on the history information storage means that stores the type of display information determined by the display information determination means as history information and the display information determined by the display information determination means. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by having a privilege granting means and a privilege variable control means for varying the privilege given by the privilege granting means based on the display information stored in the history information storage means. ..

According to the gaming machine O1, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. The identification information indicating the determination result by the pass / fail determination means is displayed by the display means. The effect mode of the identification information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the effect mode determining means. When the effect mode determined by the effect display mode determining means is a specific effect mode, one display information is determined by the display information determining means from a plurality of display information. The type of display information determined by the display information determining means is stored as history information by the history information storage means. Based on the display of the display information determined by the display information determining means, the privilege is given to the player by the privilege granting means. The privilege given by the privilege giving means is changed by the privilege variable control means based on the display information stored in the history information storage means. As a result, since the privilege is variably set based on the history information, it is possible to enjoy the variable privilege by playing the game for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be encouraged to play the game for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine O1, when the display means displays identification information indicating that the determination result by the hit / miss determination means is a specific determination result, the privileged game execution means for executing the privileged game that is advantageous to the player. And, the game state that shifts after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is set to either the first game state or the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. It has a game state setting means and a game state determining means for determining a game state set by the game state setting means based on a predetermined lottery, and the privilege granting means is determined by the game state determining means. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that it is provided with a notification mode for notifying the gaming state before the gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are played. That is, when the display means displays the identification information indicating that the determination result by the hit / miss determination means is a specific determination result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Either the first game state or the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is the game state setting means that shifts after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. Is set by. The game state set by the game state setting means is determined by the game state determination means based on a predetermined lottery. A notification mode for notifying the game state determined by the game state determining means before the game state is set is given by the privilege giving means. Therefore, since the privilege of whether or not the notification mode is notified varies based on the history information, the player can play the game so that the notification mode is notified by playing the game for a longer time. It has the effect of being able to do it.

A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K3, L1 to L2, In any of M1 to M4, N1 to N2, and O1 to O2, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information is provided, and an operation means for starting (for example, an operation lever) can be operated. Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K3, L1 to L2, A gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of M1 to M4, N1 to N2, and O1 to O2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K3, L1 to L2, In any one of M1 to M4, N1 to N2, and O1 to O2, the gaming machine Z3 is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, a lottery has been executed in which a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at the start opening, a predetermined symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a display device for a predetermined time, and then the lottery result is stopped and displayed. To. While the predetermined symbol is changing, a notice symbol or the like for notifying the player of the lottery result is displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223600).
In this type of pachinko machine, if the time for displaying a predetermined symbol on the display device is lengthened, the time until the start of the big hit becomes long and the efficiency of the game deteriorates, so that a short time is set. However, by shortening the time for displaying a predetermined symbol on the display device, the time for the production is shortened, sufficient production cannot be performed, and the player gets bored at an early stage.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting bored with a game at an early stage.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 can display the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means. It is advantageous to the player after the display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the identification information indicating a specific hit / fail determination result are displayed on the display means. Either the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the first game state set after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, or the second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state. When the game state setting means for setting one of the game state setting means and the game state determining means for determining the game state set by the game state setting means are provided, and the hit / fail determination result is the specific hit / fail determination result. As the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the first dynamic display mode and the privilege game executing means execute the privilege game. While the display means is displayed, the effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode and the effect mode displayed by the effect mode display means are selected based on the type of the game state determined by the game state determination means. The first dynamic display mode and the effect mode are displayed in combination with each other to notify the game state determined by the game state determination means. It is an embodiment.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 provides a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means. A display means that can be displayed, a dynamic display means that dynamically displays the identification information displayed on the display means, and a dynamic display time that determines a time for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means. After the determination means and the identification information indicating a specific hit / fail determination result are displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means cause the privilege game. The effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode on the display means during the execution period, the first game state set after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the first game state. It has a game state setting means for setting either of an advantageous second game state and a game state determining means for determining a game state set by the game state setting means, and the hit / fail determination result is the above-mentioned. In the case of a specific hit / fail determination result, the composite display time including the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and the display time at which the effect mode is displayed by the effect mode display means is calculated. Corresponding to the synthetic display time determining means to be determined and the synthetic display time determined by the synthetic display time determining means, the dynamic display mode of the state information indicating the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is determined. It has a dynamic display mode determining means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. The identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. After the identification information indicating a specific hit / fail determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Either the first game state set after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means or the second game state more advantageous than the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The game state set by the game state setting means is determined by the game state determination means. When the hit / fail determination result is a specific hit / fail determination result, the first dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means as the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. .. While the privilege game execution means is executing the privilege game, the effect mode is displayed on the display means by the effect mode display means. The effect mode displayed by the effect mode display means is selected by the effect mode selection means based on the type of the game state determined by the game state determination means. The first dynamic display mode and the effect mode are displayed in combination with each other to be a notification display mode for notifying the game state determined by the game state determination means.
As a result, it is possible to set a long effect period for notifying the determined gaming state. Therefore, various effects can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed on the display means. The identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The time for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. After the identification information indicating a specific hit / fail determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. While the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, the effect mode is displayed on the display means by the effect mode display means. Either the first game state set after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means or the second game state more advantageous than the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The game state set by the game state setting means is determined by the game state determination means. When the hit / fail determination result is a specific hit / fail judgment result, the composite display time including the display time in which the effect mode is displayed by the effect mode display means in the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Is determined by the synthetic display time determining means. Corresponding to the synthetic display time determined by the synthetic display time determining means, the dynamic display mode of the state information indicating the gaming state determined by the game state determining means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means.
As a result, it is possible to set a long effect period for notifying the determined gaming state. Therefore, various effects can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 game board
81 Third symbol display device (part of display means)
114 Display control means (part of dynamic display means)
S305 Part of the discrimination means
S1509, S1511 Part of the staging mode selection means
S1714 Part of the state setting means
S2213 Part of the specific information determination means

Claims (1)

Discrimination means that can perform discrimination and
A display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a display means for displaying the discrimination result.
In a gaming machine provided with a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means.
A state setting means capable of setting one effect state from a plurality of effect states including the first effect state and the second effect state, and
A specific information determining means capable of determining specific information for selecting a background image displayed on the display means associated with the first effect state and the second effect state, respectively.
According to the specific information determined by the specific information determining means, the effect mode to be displayed on the display means while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means is associated with the specific information . It is provided with a production mode selection means that can be selected from a plurality of production modes.
The specific information determining means determines the specific information dedicated to the first effect state when the first effect state is set, and the specific information dedicated to the first effect state when the second effect state is set. It is possible to determine the specific information and the specific information dedicated to the second staging state.
When the second effect state is set , the gaming machine can display the background image corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the second effect state on the display means.
The effect mode selection means is
It is configured so that the effect mode based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means can be selected .
When the second effect state is set, the effect mode corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the first effect state and the effect mode corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the second effect state are set. It is configured to be selectable and is configured to be selectable.
The first, which is determined by the specific information determining means, when the effect mode corresponding to the background image corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the second effect state determined by the specific information determining means is not selected. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to select the effect mode according to the background image corresponding to the specific information dedicated to the effect state .

Images